0% found this document useful (0 votes)

60 views335 pages

01-2 Installation Guide

Uploaded by

Catherine Higino

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

60 views335 pages

01-2 Installation Guide

Uploaded by

Catherine Higino

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 335

HUAWEI iGWB

User Manual Contents

Contents

1 Installation Overview................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Requirements on Installation Personnel..........................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Professional Knowledge and Skills........................................................................................................1-2
1.1.2 Knowledge About the Networking of the iGWB...................................................................................1-2
1.1.3 Skills in Operating the iGWB................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Installation Process..........................................................................................................................................1-3

2 Planning the iGWB Installation..............................................................................................2-1

2.1 Information to Be Obtained from the Office...................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Hardware Planning..........................................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.1 Partition Planning...................................................................................................................................2-5
2.3 Software Planning...........................................................................................................................................2-7
2.3.1 Transfer Protocol Planning.....................................................................................................................2-7
2.3.2 Planning for CDR Backup Modes..........................................................................................................2-8
2.3.3 Antivirus Software Planning................................................................................................................2-11
2.4 User Planning................................................................................................................................................2-12
2.5 IP Address Planning......................................................................................................................................2-14
2.6 Format Library Planning...............................................................................................................................2-17
2.7 Planning for the Location of an iGWB Client...............................................................................................2-18

3 Installing the iGWB Server......................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Checklist..........................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1 Checking the Hardware Components of the Server...............................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Checking the Cable Connections...........................................................................................................3-2
3.1.3 Checking the OS.....................................................................................................................................3-4
3.1.4 Checking the Link Connections.............................................................................................................3-5
3.1.5 Software Requirements........................................................................................................................3-12
3.1.6 Checking the Version of the iGWB.....................................................................................................3-13
3.2 Modifying the Settings of the OS Users........................................................................................................3-13
3.2.1 Modifying the Administrator Password...............................................................................................3-14
3.2.2 Creating a BC User and a Cluster User................................................................................................3-15
3.3 Installing and Configuring the FTP...............................................................................................................3-18
3.3.1 Checking the Installation of the FTP....................................................................................................3-19
3.3.2 Installing the FTP.................................................................................................................................3-20

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

3.3.3 Configuring the FTP.............................................................................................................................3-21

3.4 Installing and Configuring the FTAM..........................................................................................................3-27
3.4.1 Obtaining a License of the FTAM.......................................................................................................3-27
3.4.2 Installing the UTS-NetLink 5.2............................................................................................................3-30
3.4.3 Installing the UTS-FTAM 7.2..............................................................................................................3-31
3.4.4 Configuring the FTAM........................................................................................................................3-33
3.4.5 Checking the Installation of the FTAM...............................................................................................3-35
3.5 Installing the iGWB Server...........................................................................................................................3-36

4 Installing and Configuring the iGWB Client.......................................................................4-1

4.1 Checklist..........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Installing the iGWB Client..............................................................................................................................4-2
4.3 Configuring the iGWB Client.........................................................................................................................4-5
4.3.1 Configuring the Server List....................................................................................................................4-5
4.3.2 Setting the Parameters of the iGWB Client...........................................................................................4-7

5 Configuring the iGWB Server.................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Updating Format Libraries..............................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Configuring the igwb.ini File..........................................................................................................................5-2

6 Installing and Configuring the SmartBackup......................................................................6-1

6.1 Installing the SmartBackup.............................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Configuring the SmartBackup.........................................................................................................................6-3
6.2.1 Basic Knowledge....................................................................................................................................6-3
6.2.2 Backing Up CDR Files with the SmartBackup......................................................................................6-4

7 Installing the Anti-Virus Software.........................................................................................7-1

7.1 Installing the OfficeScan.................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 Installing the i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000..........................................................................................................7-2
7.3 Installing the i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000......................................................................................................7-4

8 Checking the Installation of the iGWB................................................................................. 8-1

8.1 Checking the Process Status of the iGWB Server...........................................................................................8-2
8.2 Checking the Connection to the iGWB Client................................................................................................8-4
8.3 Checking the Heartbeat Connection................................................................................................................8-5
8.4 Checking the Switchover of the iGWB...........................................................................................................8-5
8.5 Checking the Receiving and Processing of the Original CDR Files...............................................................8-7
8.6 Checking the Function of Sending Final CDRs..............................................................................................8-8

9 Backing Major Files...................................................................................................................9-1

10 Upgrading the iGWB.............................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Basic Knowledge of Upgrading the iGWB.................................................................................................10-2
10.2 Selecting the Upgrade Mode.......................................................................................................................10-2
10.3 Procedure for Smooth Upgrade of the iGWB.............................................................................................10-4
10.4 Procedure for Non-Smooth Upgrade of the iGWB.....................................................................................10-6

ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

11 Uninstalling the iGWB Server and the iGWB Client.....................................................11-1

11.1 Preparations.................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.2 Uninstalling the iGWB Server....................................................................................................................11-3
11.3 Uninstalling the iGWB Client.....................................................................................................................11-3

A Installing an OS on a Dell 2950 Server................................................................................A-1

A.1 Installation Process........................................................................................................................................A-2
A.2 Installation Planning......................................................................................................................................A-3
A.2.1 IP Address Planning.............................................................................................................................A-3
A.2.2 User Planning.......................................................................................................................................A-6
A.2.3 Partition Planning.................................................................................................................................A-8
A.3 Installation Prerequisites...............................................................................................................................A-9
A.3.1 Checking Hardware..............................................................................................................................A-9
A.3.2 Checking Software.............................................................................................................................A-10
A.4 Hardware Installation..................................................................................................................................A-10
A.4.1 Structural Views of a Dell 2950 Server..............................................................................................A-11
A.4.2 Connecting Cables..............................................................................................................................A-15
A.5 Installing and Configuring Windows 2000 Server......................................................................................A-18
A.5.1 Configuring Hard Disks as RAID 5+Hot Spare.................................................................................A-19
A.5.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server........................................................................................................A-24
A.5.3 Install Hotfixes for the OS..................................................................................................................A-26
A.5.4 Installing Network Adapter Drivers...................................................................................................A-27
A.5.5 Configuring Partitions........................................................................................................................A-28
A.5.6 Configuring Network Adapters..........................................................................................................A-30
A.6 Installing the OpenManage..........................................................................................................................A-32
A.6.1 Principle of Monitoring the Hardware...............................................................................................A-33
A.6.2 Installing and Configuring the SNMP Service...................................................................................A-33
A.6.3 Installing the OpenManage.................................................................................................................A-38
A.6.4 Checking the Hardware Monitoring Function....................................................................................A-44

B Installing an OS on an IBM x3650 Server............................................................................B-1

B.1 Installation Process........................................................................................................................................B-2
B.2 Installation Planning......................................................................................................................................B-2
B.2.1 IP Address Planning..............................................................................................................................B-3
B.2.2 User Planning........................................................................................................................................B-6
B.2.3 Partition Planning..................................................................................................................................B-7
B.3 Installation Prerequisites................................................................................................................................ B-9
B.3.1 Checking Hardware..............................................................................................................................B-9
B.3.2 Checking Software..............................................................................................................................B-10
B.4 Hardware Installation...................................................................................................................................B-10
B.4.1 Structural Views of an IBM x3650 Server.........................................................................................B-11
B.4.2 Connecting Cables..............................................................................................................................B-15
B.5 Installing and Configuring Windows 2000 Server......................................................................................B-18
B.5.1 Configuring Hard Disks as RAID 5+Hot Spare.................................................................................B-19

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

B.5.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server.........................................................................................................B-21

B.5.3 Install Hotfixes for the OS..................................................................................................................B-23
B.5.4 Configuring Partitions.........................................................................................................................B-24
B.5.5 Configuring Network Adapters...........................................................................................................B-26
B.6 Installing the Director and ServerRAID Manager.......................................................................................B-28
B.6.1 Principle of Monitoring the Hardware................................................................................................B-29
B.6.2 Installing and Configuring the SNMP Service...................................................................................B-29
B.6.3 Installing the Director.........................................................................................................................B-34
B.6.4 Installing the ServeRAID Manager....................................................................................................B-42
B.6.5 Checking the Hardware Monitoring Function....................................................................................B-48

C Installing an OS on an IBM x3650T Server.........................................................................C-1

C.1 Installation Process........................................................................................................................................C-2
C.2 Installation Planning......................................................................................................................................C-3
C.2.1 IP Address Planning..............................................................................................................................C-3
C.2.2 User Planning........................................................................................................................................C-6
C.2.3 Partition Planning..................................................................................................................................C-8
C.3 Installation Prerequisites................................................................................................................................C-8
C.3.1 Checking Hardware..............................................................................................................................C-8
C.3.2 Checking Software................................................................................................................................C-9
C.4 Hardware Installation...................................................................................................................................C-10
C.4.1 Structural Views of an IBM x3650T Server.......................................................................................C-10
C.4.2 Connecting Cables..............................................................................................................................C-14
C.5 Installing and Configuring Windows 2000 Server......................................................................................C-17
C.5.1 Configuring Hard Disks as RAID 1....................................................................................................C-18
C.5.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server.........................................................................................................C-21
C.5.3 Install Hotfixes for the OS..................................................................................................................C-23
C.5.4 Installing Motherboard Drivers...........................................................................................................C-24
C.5.5 Installing Backplane Drivers...............................................................................................................C-24
C.5.6 Installing Network Adapter Drivers....................................................................................................C-26
C.5.7 Configuring Partitions.........................................................................................................................C-28
C.5.8 Configuring Network Adapters...........................................................................................................C-29
C.6 Installing the SCSI SNMP and ISM............................................................................................................C-32
C.6.1 Principle of Monitoring the Hardware................................................................................................C-32
C.6.2 Installing and Configuring the SNMP Service...................................................................................C-33
C.6.3 Installing the SCSI SNMP..................................................................................................................C-37
C.6.4 Installing the ISM...............................................................................................................................C-45
C.6.5 Checking the Hardware Monitoring Function....................................................................................C-50

D Installing HP ProLiant DL380 G5 Server............................................................................ D-1

D.1 Installation Procedure....................................................................................................................................D-2
D.2 Installation Planning......................................................................................................................................D-3
D.2.1 IP Address Planning.............................................................................................................................D-3
D.2.2 User Planning.......................................................................................................................................D-6

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

D.2.3 Partition Planning.................................................................................................................................D-8

D.3 Installation Prerequisites...............................................................................................................................D-8
D.3.1 Check Server Hardware Configurations...............................................................................................D-8
D.3.2 Checking Software...............................................................................................................................D-9
D.4 Installing Hardware.......................................................................................................................................D-9
D.4.1 Structural Views of an HP 380G5 Server...........................................................................................D-10
D.4.2 Connecting Cables..............................................................................................................................D-11
D.5 Installing and Configuring Windows 2000 Server......................................................................................D-14
D.5.1 Setting the BIOS of the HP 380G5 Server.........................................................................................D-15
D.5.2 Configuring Hard Disks as RAID 5+Hot Spare.................................................................................D-15
D.5.3 Initializing the HP 380G5 Server.......................................................................................................D-18
D.5.4 Installing Windows 2000 Server........................................................................................................D-19
D.5.5 Install Hotfixes for the OS..................................................................................................................D-20
D.5.6 Configuring Partitions........................................................................................................................D-21
D.5.7 Configuring Network Adapters..........................................................................................................D-22
D.6 Installing the SCSI SNMP and Insight management..................................................................................D-25
D.6.1 Principle of Monitoring the Hardware...............................................................................................D-25
D.6.2 Installing and Configuring the SNMP Service...................................................................................D-26
D.6.3 Installing the Insight Manager............................................................................................................D-30
D.6.4 Checking the Hardware Monitoring Function....................................................................................D-33

E Using a Tape Drive...................................................................................................................E-1

E.1 Installing a Tape Drive...................................................................................................................................E-2
E.1.1 Connecting a Tape Driver to the iGWB Server.....................................................................................E-2
E.1.2 Installing the SCSI Driver.....................................................................................................................E-2
E.1.3 Installing the Driver of a Tape Drive....................................................................................................E-7
E.2 Using a Tape Drive to Back Up CDR Files.................................................................................................E-11
E.3 Using a Tape Drive to Restore CDR Files...................................................................................................E-15

F Acronyms and Abbreviations..................................................................................................F-1

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Figures

Figure 1-1 Installation process of the iGWB........................................................................................................1-3

Figure 2-1 Planning of IP addresses ....................................................................................................................2-2
Figure 3-1 Cable connections between an IBM x3650 server and other entities.................................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Cable connections between a DELL 2950 server and other entities..................................................3-4
Figure 3-3 Cable connections between an IBM x3650T server and other entities..............................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Network and Dial-up Connections..................................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-5 Network adapter of an IBM x3650 server..........................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-6 Network adapter of a DELL 2950......................................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-7 Network adapter of an IBM x3650T server........................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-8 New Connection - HyperTerminal................................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-9 Connect To......................................................................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-10 COM1 Properties..........................................................................................................................3-12
Figure 3-11 Computer Management..................................................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-12 Computer Management..................................................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-13 New User........................................................................................................................................3-17
Figure 3-14 New user.........................................................................................................................................3-18
Figure 3-15 Windows Components Wizard.......................................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-16 Internet Information Servies (IIS)..................................................................................................3-21
Figure 3-17 Internet Information Services.........................................................................................................3-22
Figure 3-18 FTP Site Creation Wizard...............................................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-19 IP Address and Port Settings..........................................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-20 FTP Site Home Directory...............................................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-21 BC Properties..................................................................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-22 Example of a license application form...........................................................................................3-29
Figure 3-23 Configuration Applet......................................................................................................................3-31
Figure 3-24 install services...............................................................................................................................3-32
Figure 3-25 Choose Setup Language.................................................................................................................3-36
Figure 3-26 select Program Folder.....................................................................................................................3-37
Figure 3-27 Automatic Login Setting................................................................................................................3-38
Figure 3-28 InstallShield Wizard Complete.......................................................................................................3-38
Figure 4-1 Choose Setup Language.....................................................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2 Customer Information.....................................................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-3 Select Program Folder........................................................................................................................4-3

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Figure 4-4 Choose Destination Location..............................................................................................................4-4

Figure 4-5 Start Copying Files.............................................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-6 Office Management............................................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-7 Configuration of the servers...............................................................................................................4-6
Figure 6-1 Task Manager.....................................................................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-2 Please set file-sent parameter..............................................................................................................6-5
Figure 6-3 Task Manager.....................................................................................................................................6-9
Figure 6-4 Debug Info..........................................................................................................................................6-9
Figure 7-1 Edit......................................................................................................................................................7-3
Figure 7-2 Communication port...........................................................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-3 Please select the config file.................................................................................................................7-5
Figure 10-1 Procedure for selecting the upgrade mode......................................................................................10-3
Figure 10-2 Procedure for smooth upgrade........................................................................................................10-5
Figure 10-3 Procedure for non-smooth upgrade................................................................................................10-7
Figure A-1 Process of installing a Dell 2950 server ...........................................................................................A-2
Figure A-2 Front view of a Dell 2950 server....................................................................................................A-11
Figure A-3 Two indicators on the hard disk bay...............................................................................................A-13
Figure A-4 Back view of a Dell 2950 server.....................................................................................................A-14
Figure A-5 Indicators on the redundant power equipment................................................................................A-15
Figure A-6 Network interfaces at the back of a Dell 2950 server.....................................................................A-16
Figure A-7 Connection between the serial ports of the two Dell 2950 servers.................................................A-17
Figure A-8 Connections of the C2T cables.......................................................................................................A-18
Figure A-9 Virtual Disk Management...............................................................................................................A-20
Figure A-10 Submenus of Controller 0.............................................................................................................A-21
Figure A-11 Create New VD............................................................................................................................A-21
Figure A-12 Dialog box prompting you to initialize the RAID-5 virtual disk array.........................................A-22
Figure A-13 Start Init........................................................................................................................................A-23
Figure A-14 Dialog box prompting you to determine whether to initialize the RAID-5 virtual disk array......A-23
Figure A-15 Initialization progress...................................................................................................................A-23
Figure A-16 Menu used to configure the hot spare disk...................................................................................A-24
Figure A-17 KB823980 Setup Welcome.........................................................................................................A-26
Figure A-18 System Properties.......................................................................................................................A-27
Figure A-19 Network and Dial-up Connections............................................................................................A-30
Figure A-20 Connections between the network adapters and other NEs..........................................................A-31
Figure A-21 Windows Components Wizard.....................................................................................................A-34
Figure A-22 Management and Monitoring Tools..........................................................................................A-35
Figure A-23 SNMP Service Properties.............................................................................................................A-36
Figure A-24 SNMP Service Configuration.......................................................................................................A-36
Figure A-25 SNMP Service Properties.............................................................................................................A-37
Figure A-26 SNMP Service Properties.............................................................................................................A-38
Figure A-27 Dell OpenMangage Install............................................................................................................A-39
Figure A-28 Server Administrator Installer......................................................................................................A-40

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure A-29 Welcome to the Install Wizard for Dell OpenManage Server Administrator......................A-41
Figure A-30 License Agreement......................................................................................................................A-41
Figure A-31 Set Type.......................................................................................................................................A-42
Figure A-32 Ready to Install the Program.....................................................................................................A-43
Figure A-33 Installing Dell OpenManage Server Administrator................................................................A-43
Figure A-34 Install Wizard Completed..........................................................................................................A-44
Figure A-35 Work Offline.................................................................................................................................A-45
Figure A-36 Security Alert................................................................................................................................A-45
Figure A-37 Log in............................................................................................................................................A-46
Figure B-1 Process of installing an IBM x3650 server ......................................................................................B-2
Figure B-2 Front view of an IBM x3650 server................................................................................................B-11
Figure B-3 Controls and indicators on the operator information panel.............................................................B-12
Figure B-4 Back view of an IBM x3650 server................................................................................................B-14
Figure B-5 Connections between the network adapters and other NEs............................................................B-16
Figure B-6 Connection between the serial ports of the two IBM x3650 servers...............................................B-17
Figure B-7 Connections of the C2T cables........................................................................................................B-18
Figure B-8 List of Arrays..................................................................................................................................B-19
Figure B-9 Assigned Hotspare drives................................................................................................................B-20
Figure B-10 KB823980 Setup Welcome..........................................................................................................B-24
Figure B-11 Network and Dial-up Connections.............................................................................................B-26
Figure B-12 Connections between the network adapters and other NEs..........................................................B-27
Figure B-13 Windows Components Wizard......................................................................................................B-30
Figure B-14 Management and Monitoring Tools..........................................................................................B-31
Figure B-15 SNMP Service Properties..............................................................................................................B-32
Figure B-16 SNMP Service Configuration........................................................................................................B-32
Figure B-17 SNMP Service Properties..............................................................................................................B-33
Figure B-18 SNMP Service Properties..............................................................................................................B-34
Figure B-19 IBM Director Setup.....................................................................................................................B-35
Figure B-20 Extracting Files............................................................................................................................B-35
Figure B-21 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for IBM Director Agent..............................................B-36
Figure B-22 License Agreement......................................................................................................................B-37
Figure B-23 Feature and installation directory selection..............................................................................B-37
Figure B-24 Security settings...........................................................................................................................B-38
Figure B-25 Software Distribution settings....................................................................................................B-39
Figure B-26 Ready to Install the Program.....................................................................................................B-39
Figure B-27 Ready to Install the Program.....................................................................................................B-40
Figure B-28 Network driver configuration....................................................................................................B-41
Figure B-29 InstallShied Wizard Completed.................................................................................................B-42
Figure B-30 ServeRAID Mamager.................................................................................................................B-42
Figure B-31 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for ServerRAID Manager...........................................B-43
Figure B-32 License Agreement......................................................................................................................B-44
Figure B-33 Custom Setup...............................................................................................................................B-45

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

Figure B-34 Ready to Install the Program.....................................................................................................B-46

Figure B-35 Installing ServeRAID Mamager................................................................................................B-47
Figure B-36 InstallShield Wizard Completed................................................................................................B-48
Figure B-37 ServeRAID Mamager.................................................................................................................B-49
Figure B-38 Login.............................................................................................................................................B-50
Figure B-39 huawei (Local system).................................................................................................................B-50
Figure B-40 huawei (Local system).................................................................................................................B-51
Figure B-41 Shortcut menu...............................................................................................................................B-51
Figure B-42 Window after the disk icon turns gray..........................................................................................B-52
Figure C-1 Process of installing an IBM x3650T server ....................................................................................C-2
Figure C-2 Front view of an IBM x3650T server with a plate..........................................................................C-10
Figure C-3 Front view of an IBM x3650T server without a plate.....................................................................C-11
Figure C-4 Switches and indicators on the front panel of an IBM x3650T server............................................C-11
Figure C-5 Back view of an IBM x3650T server..............................................................................................C-13
Figure C-6 Network interfaces at the back of an IBM x3650T server..............................................................C-15
Figure C-7 Connection between the serial ports of the two IBM x3650T servers............................................C-16
Figure C-8 Connections of the C2T cables.......................................................................................................C-17
Figure C-9 LSI Logic Host Bus Adapters.........................................................................................................C-19
Figure C-10 Adapter Properties......................................................................................................................C-19
Figure C-11 RAID Properties..........................................................................................................................C-20
Figure C-12 RAID Properties Changed.........................................................................................................C-20
Figure C-13 <Exit the Configuration Utility>................................................................................................C-21
Figure C-14 KB823980 Setup Welcome.........................................................................................................C-24
Figure C-15 Selecting the software that matches the SCSI connector best.......................................................C-26
Figure C-16 System Properties........................................................................................................................C-27
Figure C-17 Network and Dial-up Connections............................................................................................C-30
Figure C-18 Connections between the network adapters and other NEs..........................................................C-31
Figure C-19 Windows Components Wizard.....................................................................................................C-33
Figure C-20 Management and Monitoring Tools..........................................................................................C-34
Figure C-21 SNMP Service Properties..............................................................................................................C-35
Figure C-22 SNMP Service Configuration.......................................................................................................C-35
Figure C-23 SNMP Service Properties..............................................................................................................C-36
Figure C-24 SNMP Service Properties..............................................................................................................C-37
Figure C-25 InstallShield Wizard...................................................................................................................C-38
Figure C-26 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for LSI SCSI Storage SNMP Agent v3.04-0001.......C-39
Figure C-27 License Agreement......................................................................................................................C-40
Figure C-28 Customer Information................................................................................................................C-41
Figure C-29 Setup Type...................................................................................................................................C-42
Figure C-30 Ready to Install the Program.....................................................................................................C-43
Figure C-31 InstallShield Wizard Completed................................................................................................C-44
Figure C-32 SNMP - Service To be restarted................................................................................................C-44
Figure C-33 Welcome to Intel(R) Server Manager Setup.................................................................................C-45

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure C-34 Local Computer Details................................................................................................................C-46

Figure C-35 Installation Options.......................................................................................................................C-47
Figure C-36 Local System.................................................................................................................................C-48
Figure C-37 Confirmation.................................................................................................................................C-49
Figure C-38 System Shutdown..........................................................................................................................C-50
Figure D-1 Installation flow of HP server...........................................................................................................D-2
Figure D-2 HP 380G5 Front view of the HP server..........................................................................................D-10
Figure D-3 Indicators on the front panel...........................................................................................................D-10
Figure D-4 HP 380G5 Back view of the HP server..........................................................................................D-11
Figure D-5 Network adapters on the back of the HP server cabinet.................................................................D-12
Figure D-6 Connecting COM Port Cable..........................................................................................................D-13
Figure D-7 Connecting C2T Cables..................................................................................................................D-14
Figure D-8 Main Menu......................................................................................................................................D-16
Figure D-9 RAID configurations.......................................................................................................................D-17
Figure D-10 RAID 5 configurations..................................................................................................................D-17
Figure D-11 KB823980 Setup Welcome.........................................................................................................D-20
Figure D-12 Network and Dial-up Connections............................................................................................D-23
Figure D-13 Connections between the network adapters and other NEs..........................................................D-24
Figure D-14 Windows Components Wizard.....................................................................................................D-26
Figure D-15 Management and Monitoring Tools..........................................................................................D-27
Figure D-16 SNMP Service Properties.............................................................................................................D-28
Figure D-17 SNMP Service Configuration.......................................................................................................D-28
Figure D-18 SNMP Service Properties.............................................................................................................D-29
Figure D-19 SNMP Service Properties.............................................................................................................D-30
Figure D-20 HP SmartStart Home....................................................................................................................D-31
Figure D-21 HP SmartStart Software................................................................................................................D-31
Figure D-22 HP SmartStart Software................................................................................................................D-32
Figure D-23 HP Remote Deployment Utility....................................................................................................D-32
Figure E-1 Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard.................................................................................E-3
Figure E-2 Install Hardware Device Drivers.......................................................................................................E-4
Figure E-3 Locate Driver Files..........................................................................................................................E-5
Figure E-4 Driver Files Search Results...............................................................................................................E-6
Figure E-5 Digital Signature Not Found.............................................................................................................E-6
Figure E-6 Device Manager.................................................................................................................................E-7
Figure E-7 License Agreement............................................................................................................................ E-8
Figure E-8 Ready to Install the Program.............................................................................................................E-9
Figure E-9 Installing HP DAT and USB Mass Storage Drivers Installer - InstallShield Wizard.....................E-10
Figure E-10 Device Manager.............................................................................................................................E-11
Figure E-11 Backup...........................................................................................................................................E-12
Figure E-12 Backup Job Information................................................................................................................E-12
Figure E-13 Advanced Backup Options............................................................................................................E-13
Figure E-14 Save Selections..............................................................................................................................E-13

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

Figure E-15 Set Account Information...............................................................................................................E-14

Figure E-16 Scheduled Job Options..................................................................................................................E-14
Figure E-17 Schedule Job..................................................................................................................................E-15
Figure E-18 Restore..........................................................................................................................................E-16
Figure E-19 Waiting for tape.............................................................................................................................E-17
Figure E-20 Restore Progress............................................................................................................................E-17

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Tables

Table 1-1 Duration required by each task............................................................................................................1-4

Table 2-1 Networking information ......................................................................................................................2-3
Table 2-2 IP addresses by default ........................................................................................................................2-4
Table 2-3 Protocols Used for Transferring CDR Files Between a BC and the iGWB.........................................2-4
Table 2-4 CDR Backup Mode..............................................................................................................................2-5
Table 2-5 Antivirus Software...............................................................................................................................2-5
Table 2-6 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650 server or a Dell 2950 server..........................2-6
Table 2-7 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server...........................................................2-6
Table 2-8 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an HP 380G5 server...............................................................2-6
Table 2-9 Planned the protocols used to transfer CDR files between the iGWB and a BC.................................2-8
Table 2-10 Planned CDR backup modes..............................................................................................................2-9
Table 2-11 Planned antivirus software...............................................................................................................2-12
Table 2-12 Planned OS users..............................................................................................................................2-12
Table 2-13 Planned iGWB users........................................................................................................................2-14
Table 2-14 Planned IP addresses........................................................................................................................2-14
Table 3-1 Checking the cable connections...........................................................................................................3-3
Table 3-2 Software requirements.......................................................................................................................3-13
Table 3-3 Example..............................................................................................................................................3-35
Table 4-1 Parameters in the Office Management dialog box.............................................................................4-7
Table 4-2 Parameters related to the ports between the iGWB Client and the iGWB Server...............................4-8
Table 6-1 Parameters at local...............................................................................................................................6-6
Table 6-2 Parameter at FTP Server......................................................................................................................6-8
Table 9-1 Items to be backed up...........................................................................................................................9-1
Table 10-1 Selecting the upgrade mode.............................................................................................................10-4
Table 11-1 Backup items of the iGWB Server...................................................................................................11-2
Table 11-2 Backup items of the iGWB Client...................................................................................................11-3
Table A-1 Planned IP addresses..........................................................................................................................A-3
Table A-2 Planned OS users................................................................................................................................A-6
Table A-3 Planned iGWB users..........................................................................................................................A-7
Table A-4 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650 server or a Dell 2950 server.........................A-8
Table A-5 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server.........................................................A-8
Table A-6 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an HP 380G5 server.............................................................A-9
Table A-7 Hardware of each Dell 2950 server....................................................................................................A-9

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

Table A-8 Software of each Dell 2950 server...................................................................................................A-10

Table A-9 LED indicator, buttons, and connectors on the front panel of the Dell 2950 server........................A-11
Table A-10 Display modes of the drive status indicator in a RAID..................................................................A-13
Table A-11 Indicators on the redundant power equipment...............................................................................A-15
Table A-12 Numbered network interfaces of a Dell 2950 server......................................................................A-17
Table A-13 Items for checking whether the network adapters are installed successfully.................................A-30
Table B-1 Planned IP addresses...........................................................................................................................B-3
Table B-2 Planned OS users................................................................................................................................B-6
Table B-3 Planned iGWB users...........................................................................................................................B-7
Table B-4 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650 server or a Dell 2950 server.........................B-8
Table B-5 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server.........................................................B-8
Table B-6 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an HP 380G5 server.............................................................B-8
Table B-7 Hardware of each IBM x3650 server..................................................................................................B-9
Table B-8 Software of each IBM x3650 server.................................................................................................B-10
Table B-9 Components in the front view of an IBM x3650 server...................................................................B-11
Table B-10 Controls and indicators on the operator information panel............................................................B-12
Table B-11 Components in the back view of an IBM x3650 server.................................................................B-14
Table B-12 Numbered network interfaces of the IBM x3650 server ...............................................................B-17
Table B-13 Items for checking whether the network adapters are installed successfully.................................B-26
Table C-1 Planned IP addresses..........................................................................................................................C-3
Table C-2 Planned OS users................................................................................................................................C-6
Table C-3 Planned iGWB users...........................................................................................................................C-7
Table C-4 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server.........................................................C-8
Table C-5 Hardware of each IBM x3650T server...............................................................................................C-9
Table C-6 Software of each IBM x3650T server................................................................................................C-9
Table C-7 Switches and indicators on the front panel of an IBM x3650T server.............................................C-12
Table C-8 Numbered network interfaces of an IBM x3650T server ................................................................C-15
Table C-9 Items for checking whether the network adapters are installed successfully...................................C-30
Table D-1 Planned IP addresses..........................................................................................................................D-3
Table D-2 Planned OS users................................................................................................................................D-6
Table D-3 Planned iGWB users..........................................................................................................................D-7
Table D-4 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an HP 380G5 server.............................................................D-8
Table D-5 HP 380G5 server basic configurations...............................................................................................D-9
Table D-6 HP 380G5 server software configurations.........................................................................................D-9
Table D-7 Network adapter numbering plan.....................................................................................................D-12
Table D-8 Items for checking whether the network adapters are installed successfully...................................D-23

xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

1 Installation Overview

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the requirements on the installation personnel of the iGWB and the
process of installing the iGWB.
1.1 Requirements on Installation Personnel
This section describes the requirements on the installation personnel of the iGWB.
1.2 Installation Process
This section describes the installation process of the iGWB and the duration required by each
task.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1

1.1 Requirements on Installation Personnel

This section describes the requirements on the installation personnel of the iGWB.
1.1.1 Professional Knowledge and Skills
This section describes the required professional knowledge and skills for the installation
personnel of the iGWB.
1.1.2 Knowledge About the Networking of the iGWB
This section describes the required knowledge about the networking of the iGWB for the
installation personnel of the iGWB.
1.1.3 Skills in Operating the iGWB
This section describes the required skills in operating the iGWB for the installation personnel
of the iGWB.

1.1.1 Professional Knowledge and Skills

This section describes the required professional knowledge and skills for the installation
personnel of the iGWB.
For the installation personnel of the iGWB, the following knowledge and skills are required:
l Skills in basic computer operations
l Knowledge about the architecture and functionality of the iGWB and the process of CDR
processing
l Basic computer and network knowledge such as Ethernet, TCP/IP, and client/server
architecture
l Skills in routine operations of the iGWB

1.1.2 Knowledge About the Networking of the iGWB

This section describes the required knowledge about the networking of the iGWB for the
installation personnel of the iGWB.
For the installation personnel of the iGWB, the following knowledge is required:
l Hardware structure and performance parameters of the iGWB
l Software structure of the iGWB
l Networking between the iGWB and other NEs such as a softswitch and a BC
l Settings of the routes between the iGWB and other NEs such as a softswitch or a BC and
the protocols used by these NEs

1.1.3 Skills in Operating the iGWB

This section describes the required skills in operating the iGWB for the installation personnel
of the iGWB.
l Skills in operating the iGWB Client
l Skills in operating the iGWB Parameter Configuration Console
l Skills in operating the iGWB Debugger

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

l Acquaintance with the directory structure of the iGWB

l Skills in configuring the igwb.ini file

1.2 Installation Process

This section describes the installation process of the iGWB and the duration required by each
task.

Figure 1-1 shows the installation process of the iGWB. The tasks marked with "Optional" can
be skipped. You need to determine whether to skip the tasks according to actual situations.

Figure 1-1 Installation process of the iGWB

Start

Plan the iGWB installation

Install the iGWB Server

Install and configure the

iGWB Client

Configure the iGWB Server

(Optional) Install and

configure the SmartBackup

(Optional) Install the anti-virus

software

Check the installation of the

iGWB

Back up major files

End

Table 1-1 lists the duration required by each task.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-3

Table 1-1 Duration required by each task

Task No. Task Duration (in Hours)

1 Plan the iGWB installation 2.0

2 Install the iGWB Server 3.0

3 Install and configure the iGWB Client 1.0

4 Configure the iGWB Server 4.0

5 (Optional) Install and configure the 1.0

SmartBackup

6 (Optional) Install antivirus software 1.5

7 Check the iGWB installation 0.5

8 Back up major files 0.5

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

2 Planning the iGWB Installation

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to plan the iGWB installation.

2.1 Information to Be Obtained from the Office
Before planning the iGWB installation, you need to obtain some information from the office.
This section describes the information that you need to obtain from the office.
2.2 Hardware Planning
This section describes the planning for the hardware of the iGWB.
2.3 Software Planning
This section describes the planning for the software of the iGWB.
2.4 User Planning
The iGWB involves multiple types of users, such as the OS user on an iGWB server, the OS
user on an MT, the FTP user on a BS, the administrator of the iGWB, and the normal user of
the iGWB. Before installing the iGWB, you need to plan users.
2.5 IP Address Planning
Before installing the iGWB, you need to plan IP addresses according to the requirements of the
office. This section describes the principles of configuring IP addresses and related precautions.
This section also provides suggested IP addresses.
2.6 Format Library Planning
Different offices use different format libraries. Therefore, before installing the iGWB software,
you need to plan format libraries. This section describes the naming rules for format libraries
and the methods of identifying the format library to be used by an office.
2.7 Planning for the Location of an iGWB Client
Typically, an iGWB client is installed in a local equipment room or in an NMS center. This
section describes the precautions for installing an iGWB client in different locations.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-1

2.1 Information to Be Obtained from the Office

Before planning the iGWB installation, you need to obtain some information from the office.
This section describes the information that you need to obtain from the office.

You need to obtain the following information from the office:

l Networking information
l Protocols used for transferring CDR files between a BC and the iGWB
l CDR backup mode
l Antivirus software

Obtaining the IP Addresses

Some IP addresses of the iGWB that works with the SOFTX3000 are already defined; but other
IP addresses related to the networking must be defined according to the actual office networks.

Figure 2-1 Planning of IP addresses

Fixed IP address: Fixed IP address:
130.1.2.2 130.1.3.2

1 2

Virtual IP
Virtual IP address: iGWB1 Virutal IP address:
Fixed IP address:
172.16.200.10 172.17.200.10
address: user-
B C
129.9.1.3 defined

0 3

Fixed IP Fixed IP
Virutal IP address: Virtual IP address:
address: address:
192.168.0.30 optional
130.1.2.1 130.1.3.1
A D
1 2

iGWB0 Fixed IP
Fixed IP address:
address: user-
129.9.1.2 defined

0 3

0: network adapter 0
1: network adapter 1
2: network adapter 2
3: network adapter 3

Link A is used connect the iGWB server to the client Link B is the primary link and is used connect the
and the NMS. iGWB server to the softswitch.
Link C is the secondary link and is used connect the Link D is used to connect connect the iGWB server to
iGWB server to the softswitch. the BC.

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

NOTE
The planning of some IP addresses in the iGWB and SOFTX3000 are changed in actual offices. In this
case, you need to not only collect the information listed in Table 2-1, but also check the IP addresses in
Table 2-2.

It is recommended to print Table 2-1 before configuring parameters. In addition, collect

networking information and fill the information in the printed table.

Table 2-1 Networking information

Device Device IP Address IP Address Allocated for iGWB

BC IP Address: IP address of the network adapter 3 of the iGWB0

Subnet mask: IP Address:
Subnet mask:
IP address of the network adapter 3 of the iGWB1
IP Address:
Subnet mask:

NMS IP Address: IP Address:

Subnet mask: Subnet mask:
NOTE
Virtual IP address of the network adapter 0 of the two-
node iGWB By default, the virtual IP address is set to
129.9.1.1, and the subnet mask is set to
255.255.255.0.

Client PC 1 IP Address: IP Address:

Subnet mask: Subnet mask:
NOTE
Virtual IP address of the network adapter 0 of the two-
node iGWB By default, the virtual IP address is set to
129.9.1.1, and the subnet mask is set to
255.255.255.0.

Client PC 2 IP Address: IP Address:

Subnet mask: Subnet mask:
NOTE
Virtual IP address of the network adapter 0 of the two-
node iGWB By default, the virtual IP address is set to
129.9.1.1, and the subnet mask is set to
255.255.255.0.

Third-party IP Address: IP address of the network adapter 3 of the iGWB0

server (It Subnet mask: IP Address:
functions as
the server to Subnet mask:
back up IP address of the network adapter 3 of the iGWB1
CDR files
through a IP Address:
network.) Subnet mask:

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-3

Table 2-2 IP addresses by default

network adapter iGWB0 iGWB1
or virtual IP
address

network adapter 0 IP Address: 129.9.1.2 IP Address: 129.9.1.3

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Virtual IP address of IP Address: 129.9.1.1

the network adapter Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
0

network adapter 1 IP Address: 130.1.2.1 IP Address: 130.1.2.2

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Virtual IP address of IP Address: 172.20.200.1

the network adapter Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
1

network adapter 2 IP Address: 130.1.3.1 IP Address: 130.1.3.2

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Virtual IP address of IP Address: 172.30.200.1

the network adapter Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
2

Protocols Used for Transferring CDR Files Between a BC and the iGWB
FTP and FTAM can be used for transferring CDR files between a BC and the iGWB. See the
following table and determine the protocol to be used for transferring CDR files between the
BC and the iGWB.

Table 2-3 Protocols Used for Transferring CDR Files Between a BC and the iGWB
Item Result Remarks

Is FTP to be used? Yes. FTP is recommended.

For details, see 2.3.1 Transfer
Protocol Planning.

Is FTAM to be used? Determine whether to use For details, see 2.3.1 Transfer
FTAM according to the Protocol Planning.
contract between the carrier
and Huawei.

CDR Backup Mode

CDR files can be backed up over a network. See the following table and determine the medium
and the mode to be used for backing up CDR files.

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Table 2-4 CDR Backup Mode

Item Result Remarks

Is a third-party server Yes. A third-party server is

to be used? recommended because it ensures
high security of CDR files.
For details, see 2.3.2 Planning
for CDR Backup Modes.

Is the SmartBackup to Determine whether to use the For details, see 2.3.2 Planning
be used? SmartBackup according to the for CDR Backup Modes.
contact between the carrier and
Huawei.

Is a tape drive to be Determine whether to use a For details, see 2.3.2 Planning
used? tape drive according to the for CDR Backup Modes.
contact between the carrier and
Huawei.

Antivirus Software

Table 2-5 Antivirus Software

Item Result Remarks

Is the OfficeScan to be Yes. The OfficeScan is recommended.

used? For details, see 2.3.3 Antivirus
Software Planning.

Is the SetWin2000 to Yes. The SetWin2000 is

be used? recommended.
For details, see 2.3.3 Antivirus
Software Planning.
.

Is the SysPatron2000 Determine whether to use the For details, see 2.3.3 Antivirus
to be used? SysPatron2000 according to Software Planning.
the requirements of the office.

2.2 Hardware Planning

This section describes the planning for the hardware of the iGWB.
2.2.1 Partition Planning
This section describes the planning for the partitions of the disks on an iGWB server.

2.2.1 Partition Planning

This section describes the planning for the partitions of the disks on an iGWB server.
The iGWB uses RAID to configure the hard disks of an iGWB server as RAID 5+hot spare or
as RAID 1. According to the requirements of the iGWB Server, you need to divide the disks on

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-5

an iGWB server into three partitions and set the drive letters for the three partitions to C, D, and
E respectively. You also need to use the NTFS.

An iGWB server can be an IBM x3650 server or a Dell 2950 server or an HP 380G5 server.
Each IBM x3650 server or each Dell 2950 server or an HP 380G5 server is configured with five
146 GB hard disks. These hard disks are configured as RAID 5+hot spare. Table 2-6 and Table
2-8 list the planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650 server or a Dell 2950 server
or an HP 380G5 server. An iGWB server can also be an IBM x3650T server. Each IBM x3650T
server is configured with two 300 GB hard disks. These hard disks are configured as RAID 1.
Table 2-7 lists the planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server.

NOTE

The actual disk space may vary from the nominal disk space. Plan the space of drive D and drive E in the
proportion of 1:1.

Table 2-6 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650 server or a Dell 2950 server

Partition Size Description

C 10 GB This partition is used to install the OS and the

iGWB Server.

D 214 GB This partition is used to store original CDR

files, log files, and status files.

E 214 GB This partition is used to store final CDR files,

backup files, and status files.

F - This partition is used as a CD-ROM drive.

Table 2-7 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server

Partition Size Description

C 8 GB This partition is used to install the OS and the

iGWB Server.

D 146 GB This partition is used to store original CDR

files, log files, and status files.

E 146 GB This partition is used to store final CDR files,

backup files, and status files.

F 64 MB As the flash memory provided by an IBM

x3650T server, this partition is used to back
up the major files such as igwb.ini.

G - This partition is used as a CD-ROM drive.

Table 2-8 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an HP 380G5 server

Partition Size Description

C 8 GB This partition is used to install the OS and the

iGWB Server.

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Partition Size Description

D 215 GB This partition is used to store original CDR

files, log files, and status files.

E 215 GB This partition is used to store final CDR files,

backup files, and status files.

G - This partition is used as a CD-ROM drive.

2.3 Software Planning

This section describes the planning for the software of the iGWB.
2.3.1 Transfer Protocol Planning
The iGWB uses FTP or FTAM to transfer CDR files to a BC. Before installing the iGWB, you
need to plan the protocol used to transfer CDR files.
2.3.2 Planning for CDR Backup Modes
The iGWB supports multiple CDR backup modes. Before installing the iGWB, identify the CDR
backup mode used by the office. You are recommended to configure a backup task in the
igwb.ini file to back up CDR files to a third-party server.
2.3.3 Antivirus Software Planning
Determine whether to install antivirus software and which antivirus software to be installed
according to the contact between the carrier and Huawei. The antivirus software can be the
OfficeScan, the SysPatron2000, or the SetWin2000.

2.3.1 Transfer Protocol Planning

The iGWB uses FTP or FTAM to transfer CDR files to a BC. Before installing the iGWB, you
need to plan the protocol used to transfer CDR files.

NOTE

This section describes the protocols used to transfer CDR files between the iGWB and a BC. To back up
CDR files, the iGWB uses FTP.

The iGWB supports the following transfer modes to provide CDR files to a BC:
l Pull mode (also called passive mode)
In this mode, a BC accesses the iGWB, fetches CDR files from the iGWB, and stores the
CDR files on itself.
l Push mode (also called active mode)
In this mode, the iGWB uploads CDR files to the specified folder on the storage device of
a BC.
See the following table and determine the protocol used to transfer CDR files between the
iGWB and a BC.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-7

Table 2-9 Planned the protocols used to transfer CDR files between the iGWB and a BC

Protoc Transfer Advantage and Description

ol Mode Disadvantage

FTP Pull Advantage: This protocol is recommended.

This protocol is an Internet The protocol used by the BC of a
Push
protocol used to transfer carrier to receive CDR files
files. It is provided by the determines the protocol used by the
OS. Therefore, you can iGWB to transfer CDR files.
easily install it. You need to install and configure
Disadvantage: FTP. For details, see 3.3 Installing
This protocol uses plain and Configuring the FTP.
text to transfer CDR files.
Therefore, the security of
CDR files is not ensured.

FTAM Pull Advantage: Determine whether to use this

The security of CDR files protocol according to the
is ensured. requirements of the carrier.
Disadvantage: Determine whether to install FTAM
according to the contact between the
This protocol is installed carrier and Huawei.
through a piece of third-
party software. Therefore, You need to install and configure
you need to pay for it. You FTAM. For details, see 3.4
also need to obtain a Installing and Configuring the
dedicated license to FTAM.
activate it. In addition, the
installation process of this
protocol is complicated.

2.3.2 Planning for CDR Backup Modes

The iGWB supports multiple CDR backup modes. Before installing the iGWB, identify the CDR
backup mode used by the office. You are recommended to configure a backup task in the
igwb.ini file to back up CDR files to a third-party server.

The iGWB supports the following CDR backup modes:

l Backing up CDR files according to the backup task configured in the igwb.ini file
l Backing up CDR files by using the SmartBackup
l Backing up CDR files by using a tape drive

According to the type of the destination backup machine, the iGWB supports the following CDR
backup modes:
l Backing up CDR files to a third-party server
l Backing up CDR files between the two iGWB servers
l Backing up CDR files to a tape drive

See the following table and determine the CDR backup mode to be used by the iGWB.

2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Table 2-10 Planned CDR backup modes

CDR Backup Mode Advantage and Disadvantage Remarks

Backing up CDR files Advantages: This CDR backup mode is

to a third-party server l You can monitor the backing up recommended.
according to the of CDR files by viewing alarms. For details, see the
backup task Configuration Guide.
configured in the l No other software is required.
igwb.ini file l The iGWB can back up CDR
files to a remote third-party
server and provide disaster
tolerance.
Disadvantages:
l The standby iGWB server cannot
back up generated CDR files.
l FTP uses plain text to transfer
CDR files. Therefore, the
security of CDR files is not
ensured.

Backing up CDR files Advantages: -

between the two l You can monitor the backing up
iGWB servers of CDR files by viewing alarms.
according to the
backup task l No other software is required.
configured in the Disadvantages:
igwb.ini file. l The backups of CDR files
require the disk space of the
iGWB.
l CDR files are stored on the two
iGWB servers. Therefore, the
security of CDR files is not
ensured.
l The two iGWB servers are
installed in the same cabinet. If
the iGWB backs up CDR files
between the two iGWB servers,
the iGWB cannot provide
disaster tolerance.
l The standby iGWB server cannot
back up generated CDR files.
l FTP uses plain text to transfer
CDR files. Therefore, the
security of CDR files is not
ensured.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-9

CDR Backup Mode Advantage and Disadvantage Remarks

Backing up CDR files Advantages: Determine whether to install

to a third-party server l The security of CDR files is the SmartBackup according
by using the ensured. to the contact between the
SmartBackup carrier and Huawei.
l Using the SmartBackup, the
iGWB can easily and rapidly For details about how to
back up CDR files. install the SmartBackup, see
6.1 Installing the
l The iGWB can back up CDR SmartBackup.
files to a remote third-party
server and provide disaster For details about how to use
tolerance. the SmartBackup to back up
CDR files, see 6.2.2 Backing
l The standby iGWB server can Up CDR Files with the
back up generated CDR files. SmartBackup.
Disadvantages:
l You cannot monitor the backing
up of CDR files by viewing
alarms.
l FTP uses plain text to transfer
CDR files. Therefore, the
security of CDR files is not
ensured.

2-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

CDR Backup Mode Advantage and Disadvantage Remarks

Backing up CDR files Advantages: For details about how to

between the two l CDR files are stored on the two install the SmartBackup, see
iGWB servers by iGWB servers. Therefore, the 6.1 Installing the
using the security of CDR files is not SmartBackup.
SmartBackup ensured.
l Using the SmartBackup, the
iGWB can easily and rapidly
back up CDR files.
l The standby iGWB server can
back up generated CDR files.
Disadvantages:
l You cannot monitor the backing
up of CDR files by viewing
alarms.
l The backups of CDR files
require the disk space of the
iGWB.
l The two iGWB servers are
installed in the same cabinet. If
the iGWB backs up CDR files
between the two iGWB servers,
the iGWB cannot provide
disaster tolerance.
l FTP uses plain text to transfer
CDR files. Therefore, the
security of CDR files is not
ensured.

Backing up CDR files Advantages: For details about how to

by using a tape drive l A tape drive is a carrier-class install and use a tape drive,
device of stable performance. see E Using a Tape Drive.
l A tape provides large storage
space. The minimum storage
space of a tape is 40 GB. In
addition, tapes are easy to
change.
Disadvantages:
You need to purchase and install a
tape drive. This increases your cost.

2.3.3 Antivirus Software Planning

Determine whether to install antivirus software and which antivirus software to be installed
according to the contact between the carrier and Huawei. The antivirus software can be the
OfficeScan, the SysPatron2000, or the SetWin2000.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-11

Antivirus software is a computer program that scans and responds to malicious software such
as viruses and worms. This program may prevent you from browsing affected files, eliminate
affected files or systems, or notify you of affected programs.

A recommended antivirus scheme is SetWin + OfficeScan + Windows patches.

See the following table and plan antivirus software.

Table 2-11 Planned antivirus software

Software Description Remarks

OfficeScan This software provides the antivirus This software is recommended.

and antispyware functions in a You need to install and configure the
centralized manner. Using this OfficeScan. For details, see 7.1
software, you can protect your Installing the OfficeScan.
computer against viruses,
spysoftware, grey files, malicious
codes, and malicious programs.

SetWin2000 This software enhances the security This software is recommended.

of your Windows and ensures the You need to install and configure the
stable running of your computer. SetWin2000. For details, see 7.2
Using this software, you can protect Installing the i3SAFE SIS
your computer against illegal SetWin2000.
attacks.

SysPatron200 This software enhances the antivirus You need to install and configure the
0 performance of your Windows. SysPatron2000. For details, see 7.3
It monitors the running of WIN32 Installing the i3SAFE SIS
applications and checks the WIN32 SysPatron2000.
programs or services to be executed.
If a WIN32 program does not pass
the check, it cannot be executed. In
this case, an alarm is sent through
the alarm interface and a log is
recorded.

2.4 User Planning

The iGWB involves multiple types of users, such as the OS user on an iGWB server, the OS
user on an MT, the FTP user on a BS, the administrator of the iGWB, and the normal user of
the iGWB. Before installing the iGWB, you need to plan users.

See Table 2-12 and plan OS users. See Table 2-13 and plan iGWB users.

Table 2-12 Planned OS users

User Role Description User Name Password

Administrator An administrator has administrator The default password

all the permissions. is igwb.

2-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

User Role Description User Name Password

FTP user A BS accesses the BS is recommended. BS is recommended.

iGWB as an FTP You need to You need to
user. This FTP user is configure the user configure the user
also call a BS user. name in the igwb.ini name in the igwb.ini
The BS fetches CDR file and the file and the
files from the iGWB component service of component service of
as an FTP user. the Windows 2000 the Windows 2000
Server. Server.

The iGWB transfers The user name is

CDR files to a BS as configured by the
an FTP user. This BS.
user is created by the
BS. The BS needs to
notify the iGWB of
the user name.

An iGWB server You need to

accesses the other configure the user
iGWB server as an name in the igwb.ini
FTP user. This FTP file and the
user is also called a component service of
cluster user. the Windows 2000
One iGWB accesses Server.
the other iGWB
server to synchronize
user information as
an FTP user.

The iGWB backs up The user name is

CDR files to a third- configured by the
party server as an third-party server.
FTP user. This user is
created by the third-
party server. The
third-party server
needs to notify the
iGWB of the user
name.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-13

Table 2-13 Planned iGWB users

User Role Description User Name Password

iGWB administrator An administrator of l admin The password is left

the iGWB Client l config (Log in to blank by default. Set
manages the iGWB only the iGWB the password
software. Parameter immediately after
Configuration installing the iGWB.
Console as the
config user. )

Normal iGWB user This is a normal user Configure the user Set the password in
of the iGWB Client. name in the the Operator
Operator Management
Management window on the
window on the iGWB Client.
iGWB Client.

2.5 IP Address Planning

If any network adapter name is inconsistent with that listed in Table 2-14, reconfigure the network adapter
name. For details, see A.5.6 Configuring Network Adapters in A Installing an OS on a Dell 2950
Server, B.5.5 Configuring Network Adapters in B Installing an OS on an IBM x3650 Server, C.5.8
Configuring Network Adapters in C Installing an OS on an IBM x3650T Server, orD.5.7 Configuring
Network Adapters in D Installing HP ProLiant DL380 G5 Server.

Table 2-14 Planned IP addresses

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP
Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Primary iGWB Network This network 129.9.1.2/ 129.9.1.1

server iGWB0 adapter 0 to adapter 255.255.255.0
office LAN connects
iGWB0 to an
MT and
functions as an
NMS interface.

2-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Network This network Configure the Do not

adapter 3 to BC adapter fixed IP address configure the
connects or the subnet virtual IP
iGWB0 to a BC mask according address.
and functions as to actual
a charging situations.
interface.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-15

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Secondary Network This network 129.9.1.3/ 129.9.1.1

iGWB server adapter 0 to adapter 255.255.255.0
iGWB1 office LAN connects
iGWB1 to an
MT and
functions as an
NMS interface.

2-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Network This network Configure the Do not

adapter 3 to BC adapter fixed IP address configure the
connects or the subnet virtual IP
iGWB1 to a BC mask according address.
and functions as to actual
a charging situations.
interface.

NOTE

Plan the IP addresses of the network adapters according to actual situations. The precautions are described
as follows:
l For a two-node iGWB, you need to configure the fixed IP addresses of all the network adapters.
l The iGWB communicates with other NEs, except a BC, through virtual IP addresses. The fixed IP
addresses are masked externally.
l Negotiate with the BC about the fixed IP address used by the iGWB to communicate with the BC.
l Configure the fixed IP addresses of the network adapters according to actual situations. Ensure that
these fixed IP addresses are consistent with those specified in the igwb.ini file.
l You cannot configure the virtual IP addresses of the network adapters manually. You must configure
these virtual IP addresses in the igwb.ini file.
l Network adapter 0 connects an iGWB server to an MT or an NMS. Configure the fixed and virtual IP
addresses of network adapter 0 according to actual situations.

2.6 Format Library Planning

Different offices use different format libraries. Therefore, before installing the iGWB software,
you need to plan format libraries. This section describes the naming rules for format libraries
and the methods of identifying the format library to be used by an office.
Final CDRs support the following formats:
l Binary
l ASN.1
l Text

Format libraries are named in the following formats:

l Length of each original CDR_length of each final CDR
l Length of each original CDR_asn.1
l Length of each original CDR_txt
l Office name
l Length of each final CDR

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-17

Item Result Description

Check the version of the For example, the version According to the results, identify
softswitch. of the softswitch is the category of the format library
Check the length of each V3R6. to be used by the office.
original CDR generated by the The length of each
softswitch. original CDR generated
by the softswitch is 953
bytes.

Check the format of each final Example: l If each final CDR is in the
CDR required by the BC. l The format of each binary format, the format
Check the length of each final final CDR required library is named in the length
CDR. by the BC is the of each original CDR_length
binary format. of each final CDR format.
NOTE
If a final CDR is in the binary l The length of each l If each final CDR is in the
format, you need to check the
final CDR is 118 ASN.1 format, the format
length of the final CDR. library is named in the length
bytes.
of each original CDR_asn.1
format.
l If each final CDR is in the text
format, the format library is
named in the length of each
original CDR_txt format.
According to the results of the
given example, the format
library is 953_118.

Check the office information. The country name is According to the results, identify
Check the country name or Argentina. the format library name that
area name. The company name is contains similar information.
Check the company name. Telecom.
Check the office name. The office name is
Argentina_Telecom.

CAUTION
l Typically, by checking one or two items, you can identify the name of the format library to
be used by an office. For some offices, by checking only one item, you can identify the name
of the format library to be used by the office.
l For details about format libraries, see the Format Library and Filtering File Description
provided with the iGWB.

2.7 Planning for the Location of an iGWB Client

Typically, an iGWB client is installed in a local equipment room or in an NMS center. This
section describes the precautions for installing an iGWB client in different locations.

2-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Installation Is the iGWB Client on Remarks

Location the Same Subnetwork
as an iGWB Server?

Local equipment Yes. -

room

NMS center No. You need to configure a route on the router

through which the iGWB connects to the
NMS center. Or you can use the default
route configured on the iGWB client.
Run the following command to configure
the route: route -p add fixed IP address of
network adapter 0 on the primary or
secondary server mask 255.255.255.0 IP
address of the client

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-19

3 Installing the iGWB Server

About This Chapter

This section describes the checklist and the procedure for installing the iGWB Server.

Prerequisite
l The iGWB hardware components are installed.
l The OS is installed.

3.1 Checklist
This section describes the items you need to check before installing the iGWB Server. Check
the hardware items and then the software items.
3.2 Modifying the Settings of the OS Users
Before installing the iGWB, modify the necessary settings of the OS users.
3.3 Installing and Configuring the FTP
The iGWB supports the FTP charging interface and the FTAM charging interface. Before using
the FTP charging interface, you must install and configure the FTP.
3.4 Installing and Configuring the FTAM
The iGWB supports the FTP charging interface and the FTAM charging interface. Before using
the FTP charging interface, you must install and configure the FTAM.
3.5 Installing the iGWB Server
This section describes how to install the iGWB Server on the primary and secondary iGWB
servers.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-1

3.1 Checklist
This section describes the items you need to check before installing the iGWB Server. Check
the hardware items and then the software items.
1. 3.1.1 Checking the Hardware Components of the Server
This task is to check the hardware components and the power supply of the server.
2. 3.1.2 Checking the Cable Connections
Make sure that the cables between the primary and secondary iGWB servers and among
the KVM switch, NMC, SOFTX3000, and BC are connected properly.
3. 3.1.3 Checking the OS
This task is to check the OS version, OS patches, disk partitions, and time zone.
4. 3.1.4 Checking the Link Connections
After checking the cable connections, check the links.
5. 3.1.5 Software Requirements
Make sure that the required software applications and the associated licenses are provided.
6. 3.1.6 Checking the Version of the iGWB
Before installing the iGWB, make sure that the iGWB is compatible with the
SOFTX3000.

3.1.1 Checking the Hardware Components of the Server

This task is to check the hardware components and the power supply of the server.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the primary and secondary iGWB servers are available.

Step 2 (Optional) If a tape drive is included in the contract, also check whether the tape drive is provided.

Step 3 Check whether the power supply conforms to the requirements.

The iGWB uses a DC power supply, with an input voltage of -48 V DC. Check the power supply
label on the rear of the server.

Step 4 Power on the server. Then check whether the power indicator, drive indicator, and Ethernet
indicator are normal.

----End

3.1.2 Checking the Cable Connections

Make sure that the cables between the primary and secondary iGWB servers and among the
KVM switch, NMC, SOFTX3000, and BC are connected properly.

Procedure
For details about how to check the cable connections to the Table 3-1, see Table 3-1.

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Table 3-1 Checking the cable connections

Connection Interface Connects to

Connection between the Network interface 0 LMT or NMC

iGWB and the LMT or NMC

Connection between the Network interface 1 SOFTX3000

iGWB and the primary plane
of the SOFTX3000

Connection between the Network interface 2 SOFTX3000

iGWB and the secondary
plane of the SOFTX3000

Connection between the Network interface 3 BC

iGWB and the BC

Two-node iGWB serial Serial port Primary or secondary iGWB

heartbeat server

NOTE

If the iGWB connects to an entity through the LAN switch, also check the cable connection to the LAN switch.

If the iGWB is installed on an IBM x3650 server, connect the cables between the server and
other entities as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Cable connections between an IBM x3650 server and other entities
Connecting to a BC
(Network interface 2) (Network interface 3)
Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 1)

(Serial port) Connecting to an
Primary link between the
NMS or an MT
iGWB and a softswitch

If the iGWB is installed on a DELL 2950 server, connect the cables between the server and other
entities as shown in Figure 3-2.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-3

Figure 3-2 Cable connections between a DELL 2950 server and other entities

Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch Connecting to a BC

(Network interface 2) (Network interface 3)

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 1)

(Serial port) Primary link between the iGWB and
Connecting to an NMS or an MT
a softswitch

If the iGWB is installed on an IBM x3650T server, connect the cables between the server and
other entities as shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 Cable connections between an IBM x3650T server and other entities

Primary link between the iGWB and a softswitch

Connecting to a BC
(Network interface 1) (Network interface 3)

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 2)

Connecting to an NMS or an MT Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch

----End

3.1.3 Checking the OS

This task is to check the OS version, OS patches, disk partitions, and time zone.

Prerequisite
The OS is installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the OS is correctly installed.
1. On the desktop, right-click My Computer and then choose Properties.
2. In the System Properties dialog box, click the General tab.

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Check the information in System. If Microsoft Windows 2000 Server and Service Pack 4
are displayed, this indicates that the Windows 2000 Server is correctly installed.

Step 2 Check the disk partitions.

1. On the desktop, double-click My Computer. On the toolbar of the My Computer window,

click and then select Details.

2. Check whether the names and sizes of the disk partitions are correct.
For details, see 2.2.1 Partition Planning.

Step 3 Check the file systems of the disks.

CAUTION
The OS must use the NTFS file system. Make sure that the FTP sites created on the OS where
the Windows 2000 Server runs meet the requirements of the iGWB.

1. In the My Computer window, right-click Local disk (C:) and then choose Properties.
The Local disk (C:) Properties is displayed.
2. Click the General tab to check whether the file system is NTFS.
3. To check the file system of disk D, repeat Step 3.1 through Step 3.2.

Step 4 Check the system time and time zone.

CAUTION
The time and the time zone of the OS must be consistent with those of the softswitch. Otherwise,
the time when the CDR files is generated by the iGWB is inconsistent with the time provided
in the CDR files.

1. Choose Start > Settings > Control Panel > Date/Time.

2. On the Date & Time tab of the window, check whether the time and date are correct.
3. Click the Time Zone tab to check whether the time zone is correct.

----End

3.1.4 Checking the Link Connections

After checking the cable connections, check the links.

Prerequisite
The cables are correctly and firmly connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the IP addresses of the network adapters of the primary and secondary iGWB servers.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-5

NOTE
Set the IP address of the network adapter of the primary iGWB server and then the IP address of the network
adapter of the secondary iGWB server.
1. Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network and Dial-up
Connections.
The Network and Dial-up Connections window is displayed. See Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Network and Dial-up Connections

2. Ensure that all local connections are correct.

The following table lists the status icons of a local connection.

Status Icon Description

The status icon of the local connection is Indicates that the network adapter is
successfully installed and properly
(activated). connected.

The status icon of the local connection is Indicates that the network adapter is
installed but incorrectly connected. In this
case, check the cable connection.
(deactivated).

In the Network and Dial-up window, no Indicates that the network adapter is
status icon is displayed. installed unsuccessfully. In this case,
reinstall the network adapter.

3. Plug and unplug the cables to identify the physical mappings between the network adapters
and other NEs. Label the cables.
Figure 3-5, Figure 3-6, and Figure 3-7 show the correct physical mappings between the
network adapters and other NEs.

For details about how to connect the network adapters to other NEs, see A.5.6 Configuring
Network Adapters in A Installing an OS on a Dell 2950 Server, B.5.5 Configuring

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Network Adapters in B Installing an OS on an IBM x3650 Server, and C.5.8

Configuring Network Adapters in C Installing an OS on an IBM x3650T Server.

Figure 3-5 Network adapter of an IBM x3650 server

Connecting to a BC
(Network interface 2) (Network interface 3)
Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 1)

(Serial port) Connecting to an
Primary link between the
NMS or an MT
iGWB and a softswitch

Figure 3-6 Network adapter of a DELL 2950

Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch Connecting to a BC

(Network interface 2) (Network interface 3)

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 1)

(Serial port) Primary link between the iGWB and
Connecting to an NMS or an MT
a softswitch

Figure 3-7 Network adapter of an IBM x3650T server

Primary link between the iGWB and a softswitch

Connecting to a BC
(Network interface 1) (Network interface 3)

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 2)

Connecting to an NMS or an MT Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch

NOTE
In Figure 3-5, Figure 3-6, and Figure 3-7, the softswitch refers to the SOFTX3000.
4. For the LAN switch, set the IP addresses of network interface 1 and network interface 2 to
fixed IP addresses. The fixed IP addresses are the same as the virtual IP addresses defined

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-7

in the IP address planning. They are 172.20.200.1 and 172.30.200.1. For details about the
IP address planning, see 2.5 IP Address Planning.
NOTE
The iGWB can connect to the SOFTX3000 only through a virtual IP address. At this stage, however,
no virtual IP address is provided. Therefore, you need to create a virtual IP address locally and then
check the connection to the SOFTX3000.
5. Configure fixed IP addresses for network interface 0 and network interface 3.
The two IP addresses are used to connect the maintenance terminal and the NMC to the
BC. Therefore, before configuring the IP addresses, you need to negotiate with the office.
6. Repeat Step 1.1 through Step 1.5 on the secondary iGWB server.

Step 2 Check the Ethernet links.

NOTE

If a firewall is installed, running the ping command may cause errors.

1. On the primary iGWB server, run the ping command to check the connection to the
secondary iGWB server.
Check the four network adapters of the secondary iGWB server.

Network Fixed IP Address Command

Adapter of the
Secondary iGWB
Server

Network adapter 0 129.9.1.3 ping 129.9.1.3

To check whether the link is
connected.

Network adapter 1 130.1.2.2 ping 130.1.1.2

To check whether the link is
connected.

Network adapter 2 130.1.3.2 ping 130.1.1.2

To check whether the link is
connected.

2. On the secondary iGWB server, run the ping command to check the connection to the
primary iGWB server.

Network Fixed IP Address Command

Adapter of the
Primary iGWB
Server

Network adapter 0 129.9.1.2 ping 129.9.1.2

To check whether the link is
connected.

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Network Fixed IP Address Command

Adapter of the
Primary iGWB
Server

Network adapter 1 130.1.2.1 ping 130.1.1.1

To check whether the link is
connected.

Network adapter 2 130.1.3.1 ping 130.1.1.1

To check whether the link is
connected.

Network adapter 3 The fixed IP address ping fixed IP address through which
allocated to the BC. This the BC is connected to
fixed IP address after To check whether the link is
idefined in the connected.
networking planning.
3. On the primary and secondary iGWB servers, run the ping command to check the
connections to the iGWB Client, BC, and SOFTX3000.
NOTE

l On the primary and secondary iGWB servers, two IP addresses (a virtual IP address and a fixed
IP address) must be configured for network adapter 0 so that the servers can connect to the iGWB
Client.
l The virtual IP address is configured in the igwb.ini file of the iGWB. To check the link
connectivity, the fixed IP address is set to the same value as the virtual IP address. Before
checking, set the fixed IP address as required.

Check Fixed IP Fixed IP Address Description

Item Address of the iGWB

iGWB Fixed IP address 129.9.1.1 (virtual IP ping fixed IP address of the

Client of the iGWB address) iGWB Client
Client If the primary and secondary
You can obtain iGWB servers connect to the
the fixed IP iGWB Client through the virtual
address from the IP address, 129.9.1.1, check the
current office. links on the primary and
secondary iGWB servers.

129.9.1.2 ping fixed IP address of the

iGWB Client
If the primary iGWB server
connects to the iGWB Client
through the virtual IP address,
129.9.1.2, check the links on the
primary iGWB server.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-9

Check Fixed IP Fixed IP Address Description

Item Address of the iGWB

129.9.1.3 ping fixed IP address of the

iGWB Client
If the secondary iGWB server
connects to the iGWB Client
through the fixed IP address,
129.9.1.3, check the links on the
secondary iGWB server.

BC Fixed IP address The primary iGWB ping fixed IP address of the BC

of the BC server connects to On the primary iGWB server,
You can obtain the BC through the check the links between the
the fixed IP fixed IP address of primary iGWB server and the
address from the network adapter 3. BC.
current office. You can obtain the
fixed IP address
from the office.

The secondary ping fixed IP address of the BC

iGWB server On the secondary iGWB server,
connects to the BC check the links between the
through the fixed IP secondary iGWB server and the
address of network BC.
adapter 3. You can
obtain the fixed IP
address from the
office.

SOFTX30 Fixed IP address 172.20.200.1 ping fixed IP address of the

00 (es) of the 172.30.200.1 SOFTX3000
SOFTX3000. Check whether the primary and
The fixed IP secondary links through which
address(es) can the SOFTX3000 is connected
be obtained are normal.
from the office.
4. Make sure that the previously mentioned links are normal.
Step 3 On the Hyper Terminal, check the serial links between the primary and secondary iGWB servers.
The iGWB uses two heartbeat links. One is a serial link. To ensure that the heartbeat links are
normal, you need to check the serial link.
NOTE

The other heartbeat link is a network interface link. It is a backup link used to connect to the
SOFTX3000. For details about how to check the network interface link, refer to the procedure for checking
the Ethernet link.
1. Connect an RJ45-DB9 adapter to COM1 of the primary iGWB server. Also, connect a DB9
cable to the serial port of a PC or a laptop.
NOTE

The following shows how to connect a RJ45 connector to a PC through a DB9 serial port.
2. On the PC, choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications >
HyperTerminal.

3-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

The New Connection - HyperTerminal window is displayed. See Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8 New Connection - HyperTerminal

3. In the Connection Description dialog box, enter a new connection name. Click OK.
For example, test1.
4. In the Connect To dialog box, select COM1. Click OK. SeeFigure 3-9.

Figure 3-9 Connect To

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-11

The COM1 Properties dialog box is displayed.

5. Set a value in Bits per second. The value range is from 9600 to 19200. In Parity, select
None. Use the default settings for other options. See Figure 3-10. Click OK.

Figure 3-10 COM1 Properties

6. In the Test1 - HyperTerminal window, type the content or specify a file you intend to
send. Check whether the communication through the serial port is normal.
For example, type Test123456. This content is not displayed in the text box.
7. On the primary iGWB server, start the HyperTerminal. Choose Start > Programs >
Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal .
If the primary server of the iGWB can be correctly displayed and can successfully receive
or send messages or files, it indicates that the communication through COM1 is normal.
8. Repeat the previous steps to check the communication through a serial port on the secondary
iGWB server.

----End

3.1.5 Software Requirements

Make sure that the required software applications and the associated licenses are provided.

3-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Context
NOTE

The primary and secondary servers of the iGWB must be installed with the same software applications.
Table 3-2 lists the required software applications. The software applications vary with servers. For a
complete list, refer to the packing list.

Procedure
Check the software requirements as described in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 Software requirements

Item License Description

Windows 2000 Server OS Not required. To install the OS and the

related protocol components.

iGWB software applications Legal licenses must be To install the iGWB Server
obtained from Huawei. and the iGWB Client.

FTAM and protocol stack Legal licenses must be To use the FTAM charging
software application obtained from VERTERL. interface, install this software
(optional) application.

SmartBackup (optional) Not required. This tool is used to back up

CDR files.

i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000 Legal licenses must be This is a type of anti-virus

(optional) obtained from Huawei. software.

i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000 Legal licenses must be This is a type of anti-virus

(optional) obtained from Huawei. software.

OfficeScan (optional) Legal licenses must be This is a type of anti-virus

obtained from Huawei. software.

----End

3.1.6 Checking the Version of the iGWB

Before installing the iGWB, make sure that the iGWB is compatible with the SOFTX3000.

Context
For details about the version mappings between the iGWB and the SOFTX3000 or between
other entities, see the Release Notes and the Version Configuration Information.

3.2 Modifying the Settings of the OS Users

Before installing the iGWB, modify the necessary settings of the OS users.
3.2.1 Modifying the Administrator Password
By default, on the iGWB server, the password of administrator is igwb. To ensure system
security, it is recommended to modify the default password.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-13

3.2.2 Creating a BC User and a Cluster User

This section describes how to create a BC user and a cluster user and how to set the user names,
passwords, and access permissions on the primary and secondary iGWB servers. On the BC, a
BC user can log in to the iGWB through FTP to fetch CDR files. On the primary iGWB server,
a cluster user can log in to the secondary iGWB server through FTP to synchronize subscriber
information and back up CDR files between the two servers, and vice versa.

3.2.1 Modifying the Administrator Password

By default, on the iGWB server, the password of administrator is igwb. To ensure system
security, it is recommended to modify the default password.

Prerequisite
The OS is installed and the password of administrator is specified.

Context

CAUTION
Before installing the iGWB, be sure to modify the password of administrator. If you modify
the password after installing the iGWB, the iGWB cannot be automatically logged in to. In some
special cases where the password is modified after the iGWB is installed, to enable automatic
login, modify the related automatic login settings of the iGWB.

Procedure
Step 1 On the desktop, right-click My Computer and then choose Manage.
The Computer Management window is displayed.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose System Tools > Local Users and Groups > Users.
The existing users of the OS are displayed in the right pane. See Figure 3-11.

3-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure 3-11 Computer Management

Step 3 In the right pane, right-click Administrator and then choose Set Password
Step 4 Click Proceed. The Set Password for Administrator window is displayed. Enter and confirm
the new password. Then click OK.
The Local Users and Groups is displayed, indicating that the new password is successfully set.
Step 5 Click OK.

----End

3.2.2 Creating a BC User and a Cluster User

Prerequisite
Log in to the OS as administrator or any other user that has the same permissions as
administrator.

Context
On the BC, log in to the iGWB through FTP to fetch CDR files. On the primary iGWB server,
a cluster user can log in to the secondary iGWB server through FTP to synchronize subscriber
information and back up CDR files between the two servers, and vice versa.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-15

A BC user and a cluster user must be created for both the primary and secondary iGWB servers.

Procedure
Step 1 Create a BC user on both the primary and secondary iGWB servers.
NOTE

The procedure for creating a BC user on the primary iGWB server and that on the secondary iGWB server are
the same. Create a BC user on the primary iGWB server and then on the secondary iGWB server.
1. Choose Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
The Computer Management dialog box is displayed. See Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Computer Management

2. In the navigation tree, choose Local Users and Groups > Users. Right-click Users and
then choose New User .
3. In the New User dialog box, enter the user name and password, confirm the password, and
then select Password never expires. See Figure 3-13. Confirm the settings and then click
Create.

3-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure 3-13 New User

NOTE

l For details about how to set the user name, password, and other related settings, see 2.4 User
Planning. Anonymous login to the BC is not allowed. Otherwise, after anonymous login, you
cannot access the FTP sites on the iGWB server.
l To avoid network attacks, modify the user name to a safer one. If you do this, also remember to
modify the relevant user information when configuring an FTP site.

Step 2 Create a cluster user on both the primary and secondary iGWB servers.
NOTE

The procedure for creating a cluster user on the primary iGWB server and that on the secondary iGWB server
are the same. Create a cluster user on the primary iGWB server and then on the secondary iGWB server.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Local Users and Groups > Users. Right-click Users and
then choose New User.
2. In the New User dialog box, enter the user name and password, confirm the password, and
then select Password never expires. Confirm the settings and then click Create. See
Figure 3-14.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-17

Figure 3-14 New user

NOTE

----End

3.3 Installing and Configuring the FTP

The iGWB supports the FTP charging interface and the FTAM charging interface. Before using
the FTP charging interface, you must install and configure the FTP.

Context
The iGWB uses the FTP in the following cases:
l When the iGWB sends CDR files to the BC.
l When CDR files are backed up.
l When the subscriber information is synchronized between the primary and secondary
iGWB servers.
1. 3.3.1 Checking the Installation of the FTP
By default, the FTP is installed on the iGWB server before factory delivery. This section
describes how to check whether the FTP is correctly installed.

3-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

2. 3.3.2 Installing the FTP

If the FTP is not currently installed on the server, install the FTP on site. This section
describes how to install the FTP.
3. 3.3.3 Configuring the FTP
After installing the FTP, configure the FTP based on the configuration of the iGWB and
the requirements from the BC.

3.3.1 Checking the Installation of the FTP

By default, the FTP is installed on the iGWB server before factory delivery. This section
describes how to check whether the FTP is correctly installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the FTP is installed on the primary iGWB server.
1. Log in to the secondary iGWB server as administrator.
2. Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, type cmd and then press Enter.
The command line window is displayed.
3. In the command line window, type ftp IP address of the primary iGWB server and then
press Enter.
For example, ftp 129.9.1.2.
4. Enter the user name and password.
If the following information is displayed, it indicates that you have successfully logged in
to the FTP.
Connected to 129.9.1.2. 220 unknown FTP server ready. User (129.1.1.3:(none)):
"User name" 331 Password required for "User name". Password: 230 User "User
name" logged in. ftp>

If the previous information is not displayed, it indicates that the FTP is unsuccessfully
installed. In this case, reinstall the FTP and then configure the relevant settings.
5. Enter mkdir test and then press Enter.
If the test folder is created on the primary iGWB server, it indicates that the current FTP
user has the read and write permissions. If the test folder cannot be created, modify the
related settings of the FTP site.
6. Enter rm test and then press Enter. Delete the test folder.

Step 2 Check whether the FTP is installed on the secondary iGWB server.
1. Log in to the primary iGWB server as administrator.
2. Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, type cmd and then press Enter.
The command line window is displayed.
3. In the command line window, type ftp IP address of the secondary iGWB server and then
press Enter.
For example, ftp 129.9.1.3.
4. Enter the user name and password.
If the following information is displayed, it indicates that you have successfully logged in
to the FTP.
Connected to 129.9.1.3. 220 unknown FTP server ready. User (129.1.1.3:(none)):
"User name" 331 Password required for "User name". Password: 230 User "User
name" logged in. ftp>

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-19

----End

3.3.2 Installing the FTP

If the FTP is not currently installed on the server, install the FTP on site. This section describes
how to install the FTP.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the Windows Server 2000 CD-ROM.

Step 2 Choose Start > Settings > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs > Add/Remove
Windows Components.
The Windows Components Wizard dialog box is displayed. See Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-15 Windows Components Wizard

Step 3 Double-click Internet Information Service (IIS). In the displayed dialog box, select Internet
Information Services Manager and File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service. See Figure
3-16. Click OK, and then Next.

3-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

NOTE

When installing the IIS, do not select NNTP Service and World Wide Web Service. The two services
are vulnerable to attacks. To ensure network security, it is recommended that you do not install the two
services.

Figure 3-16 Internet Information Servies (IIS)

Step 4 The system starts copying files. After the installation is complete, the configuration window is
closed.

----End

3.3.3 Configuring the FTP

After installing the FTP, configure the FTP based on the configuration of the iGWB and the
requirements from the BC.

Prerequisite
l The FTP is installed.
l A BC user and a cluster user are created.

Context
On the iGWB server, create an FTP site to start an FTP service. Usually, the FTP sites on the
iGWB server are used to send CDR files, synchronize subscriber information between the
primary and secondary iGWB servers, and back up CDR files between the primary and secondary
iGWB servers.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-21

Procedure
Step 1 Create an FTP site, for example, BC. Through this site, the BC can fetch CDR files from the
iGWB.
1. Choose Start > Programs > Administrator Tools > Internet Information Services (IIS)
Manager.
The Internet Information Services dialog box is displayed. See Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-17 Internet Information Services

2. In the navigation tree, right-click Default FTP Site and then choose New > FTP Site.
The FTP Site Creation Wizard dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Next. In the displayed window, type in the description of the FTP site, for example,
BC.
Through this FTP site, the BC can fetch CDR files from the iGWB. See Figure 3-18.

3-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure 3-18 FTP Site Creation Wizard

4. In the IP Address and Port Settings dialog box, specify the IP address and TCP port
number of the network adapter of the BC. See Figure 3-19.
NOTE

Based on the IP address planning of the iGWB, you can infer that the IP address is the IP address of
the renamed network adapter 3. Before setting this IP address, you need to negotiate with the BC. It
is recommended to use the default TCP port number. Settings provided in the Figure 3-19 are for
your reference only.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-23

Figure 3-19 IP Address and Port Settings

5. Specify the home directory for the FTP site. For example, E:\backsave\Second. See Figure
3-20. Click Next.
The FTP Site Access Permissions is displayed.

3-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure 3-20 FTP Site Home Directory

6. Select the Read and Write options for the FTP site. Click Next. Click Finish.

Step 2 Configure the properties of the BC FTP site.

1. In the navigation tree, right-click BC and then choose Properties.
The BC Properties dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Security Accounts tab. To ensure security, do not select Allow Anonymous
Connections. Use the default settings for other options. See Figure 3-21. In the displayed
window, click Yes.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-25

Figure 3-21 BC Properties

3. In FTP Site Operators, click Add.

4. In the Select Users or Groups dialog box, select BC and then click Add. Click OK.
5. On the Home Directory tab, select UNIX in Directory Listing Style.

Step 3 Create an FTP site, for example, Cluster.

Through this site, the subscriber information is synchronized between the primary and secondary
iGWB servers.
NOTE

The other settings for creating the Cluster FTP site are the same as those for creating the BC FTP site, except
for the following settings:
l The description of the Cluster FTP site is Cluster.
l The IP address of the Cluster FTP site is the IP address of network adapter 2.
l The home directory of the Cluster FTP site is D:\other.

Step 4 Ensure that the settings of the Cluster FTP site are correct.
1. In E:\backsave\Second, create a file, test1. In D:\other, create another file, test2.
2. Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter cmd. The command line window is
displayed.
3. Enter ftpIP address of network adapter 3 open to the BC. At the command prompt, type
in the user name, BC. Press Eneter and then type in the password.
4. Enter mkdir a to create a directory, a.
If the directory can be successfully created, it indicates that the current user has the write
permission. If the directory cannot be created, it indicates that the current user does not
have the write permission. In this case, allocate the write permission to the BC user.

3-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

5. Enter dir to view the details of the current directory.

If the test1 file is created in both the newly created a directory and in E:\backsave
\Second, it indicates that the home directory of the BC user is E:\backsave\Second. Enter
bye to end the current session.
6. Enter ftpIP address of network adapter 2. At the command prompt, type in the user name,
Cluster. Press Eneter and then type in the password.
7. Enter mkdir b to create a directory, b.
If the directory can be successfully created, it indicates that the current user has the write
permission. If the directory cannot be created, it indicates that the current user does not
have the write permission. In this case, allocate the write permission to the Cluster user.
8. Enter dir to view the details of the current directory.
If the test2 file is created in both the newly created b directory and in E:\backsave
\Second, it indicates that the home directory of the Cluster user is D:\other. Enter bye to
end the current session.
Step 5 Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 to configure the FTP site on the other node of the iGWB.

----End

3.4 Installing and Configuring the FTAM

The iGWB supports the FTP charging interface and the FTAM charging interface. Before using
the FTP charging interface, you must install and configure the FTAM.
1. 3.4.1 Obtaining a License of the FTAM
Before installing the FTAM, obtain a license from Vertel. This section describes how to
obtain a license from Vertel.
2. 3.4.2 Installing the UTS-NetLink 5.2
The UTS-FTAM 7.2 consists of the protocol stack software and the application-layer
software. You need to install the protocol stack software and then the application software.
This section describes how to install the protocol stack software.
3. 3.4.3 Installing the UTS-FTAM 7.2
This section describes how to install the UTS-FTAM 7.2.
4. 3.4.4 Configuring the FTAM
To enable the FTAM to open CDR files to the BC, you need to configure the FTAM. This
section describes how to configure the FTAM.
5. 3.4.5 Checking the Installation of the FTAM
After installing the FTAM, check whether the FTAM is correctly installed.

3.4.1 Obtaining a License of the FTAM

Before installing the FTAM, obtain a license from Vertel. This section describes how to obtain
a license from Vertel.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-27

Context

WARNING
l Please contact Huawei Technical Support. Huawei to help you obtain a license from Vertel.
l You need to purchase only one license. Therefore, provide only one MAC address to the
supplier.
l The UTS-NetLink 5.2 and the UTS-FTAM 7.2 are provided in two separate CD-ROMs.
Therefore, you need to obtain the licenses of both the UTS-NetLink 5.2 and the UTS-FTAM
7.2. Normally, it takes 24 hours for you to obtain the license.

Procedure
Step 1 On the primary and secondary iGWB servers, run the C:\ipconfig/all command.
The information about the four network adapters is displayed. Network adapter 3 is the network
adapter through which the BC is connected to. Mark down the MAC address of network adapter
3.
Step 2 Fill in the license application form.
Figure 3-22 shows an example.

3-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure 3-22 Example of a license application form

License Application Form

Contract
Company Date
number

Mobile
Contact Telephone
phone
Address

Email
MAC
Development Validity
Software Version Platform Quantity address/Host
version/Running version period
ID

Note: To obtain the license in time, please fill in all the fields above.

Temporary license validity period

Permanent license

Comment from the Order

Fulfillment Department, SCMD

Comment from the Market

Technology Office, R&D

Signning
Signed
date
User's aceptance
Filled by report
Planned
Huawei Not signed
signing date

Yes No
Technical attachment
Not
Attached Remarks
attached
Not
Bill of Material Attached
attached

Technical problems
solved

Signature of engineer

Step 3 Send the MAC addresses of the primary and secondary iGWB servers to Vertel at
license@vertel.com or tekview@sh163b.sta.net.cn.
One day later, you will receive a message containing the license from Vertel.
NOTE

Be sure to send the mail to Vertel through a Huawei mail box. Also, in the mail message, mention that you
need to use the UTS-Netlink services.

Example of a mail message:

Dear Sir, I'm an engineer working in Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. I have just
purchased two sets of software of UTS-NetLink 5.2 and UTS-FTAM 7.2. Would you like
to send the correlated licenses to me? Here is my hostid: hostid-1: 00-02-55-C7-54-
C5 hostid-2:00-02-55-C7-54-C6 Thank you!

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-29

Step 4 Receive the licenses through email.

The following is a sample of the license provided by Vertel:
SERVER snaylm 00065B24A878 VENDOR vertellm INCREMENT UTSftam vertellm 1.9999 30-
jul-2002 4 F3A2A3EB13BA ck=129 \ SN=200003150434

INCREMENT UTS-TCP vertellm 5.9999 30-jul-2002 uncounted C51951682126 \

HOSTID=00065B24A878 ck=129 SN=200003150434

INCREMENT UTS-LAN vertellm 5.9999 30-jul-2002 uncounted 807A7126DB50 \

HOSTID=00065B24A878 ck=129 SN=200003150434

The fourth line provides the license of the UTS-FTAM. The eighth line provides the license of
the UTS-NetLink. In the license of the UTS-FTAM, replace snaylm with the host name.

----End

3.4.2 Installing the UTS-NetLink 5.2

The UTS-FTAM 7.2 consists of the protocol stack software and the application-layer software.
You need to install the protocol stack software and then the application software. This section
describes how to install the protocol stack software.

Prerequisite
The installation CD-ROM of the UTS-NetLink5.2 and the license are provided. Make sure that
the license does not expire.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the Setup.exe file from the installation CD-ROM of the UTS-NetLink 5.2.
Step 2 In the Resource Manager window, run the Setup.exe file.
The setup program is preparing the installation wizard. Afterwards, the Welcome page is
displayed.
Step 3 Click Next.
The Software License Agreement dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 The default installation path is c:\Program File\Vertel UTS-NetLink. To change the
installation path, click Browse. Then click Next.
The Select Program Folder dialog box is displayed.
NOTE

This section uses the default installation path as an example.

Step 5 It is recommended to use the default settings. Click Next.

The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click Next.
The setup program starts copying files. After the files are copied to the related folders, the UTS-
NetLink Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Click Next.
The Configuration Applet dialog box is displayed.
Step 8 Configure the settings of the network adapter. It is recommended to use the default settings. See
Figure 3-23. Click OK.

3-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure 3-23 Configuration Applet

Step 9 After installation, open Vertel UTS-NetLink in Control Panel. In the Vertel UTS-NetLink
dialog box, modify the relevant settings and then click OK.

Step 10 In the Network Configuration dialog box, click Next.

The setup program automatically configures the network components. After configuration, the
Setup Complete dialog box is complete.

Step 11 Select No, I will restart my computer later and then click Finish. The Setup Complete dialog
box is closed.

Step 12 Copy the license of the UTS-NetLink to C:\Program Files\Vertel UTS-NetLink\etc

\license.dat. Save the file and exit.

----End

3.4.3 Installing the UTS-FTAM 7.2

This section describes how to install the UTS-FTAM 7.2.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-31

Procedure
Step 1 Run the Setup.exe file from the installation CD-ROM of the UTS-FTAM 7.2.
The setup program is preparing the installation wizard. Afterwards, the InstallShield Wizard
dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Click Next.

The InstallShield Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Specify the installation path. It is recommended to use the default installation path. Click
Next.
The InstallShield Wizard dialog box is displayed.
NOTE

To change the installation path, click Browse.

Step 4 Select Typical as the installation mode and then click Next.
The InstallShield Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Use the default setting, UTS_FTAM 72 DEV. Then click Next.
The InstallShield Wizard dialog box is displayed, showing the current settings.

Step 6 Click Next.

The InstallShield Wizard dialog box is displayed. The setup program starts copying files. After
the files are copied to the relevant folders, the install services dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Use the default settings. See Figure 3-24. Click OK.
The InstallShield Wizard dialog box is displayed, prompting whether you want to restart the
PC.

Figure 3-24 install services

Step 8 Select No, I will restart my computer later and then click Finish.

3-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Step 9 Create the license.dat file in C:\UTS_FTAM\Flexlm\. Copy the license of the UTS-FTAM 7.2
to the license.dat file. Save the file and exit.

Step 10 On the desktop, right-click My Computer and then choose Properties .

The System Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 11 On the Advanced tab, click Environment Variables. In the Environment Variables dialog
box, check whether the LM_LICENSE_FILE variable is listed in the System Variables group
box.
NOTE

l If the LM_LICENSE_FILE variable is not listed, add the variable. Set the value of the variable to the
paths where the license files of the UTS_NetLink and the UTS_FTAM are stored. Separate the paths
with a semicolon (;).
l If you have selected the default installation path during the setup, set the value of the environment
variable to C:\Program Files\Vertel UTS-NetLink\etc\license.dat ; C:\UTS_FTAM\flexlm\
license.dat.

Step 12 Restart the PC to have the application software and the settings take effect.

----End

3.4.4 Configuring the FTAM

To enable the FTAM to open CDR files to the BC, you need to configure the FTAM. This section
describes how to configure the FTAM.

Prerequisite
The UTS-NetLink 5.2. and the UTS-FTAM 7.2 are installed.

Context
In C:\UTS_FTAM\cfg, configure the following files:
l ffs.cfg
l ffs.aut
l eatable.txt
NOTE

After modifying the files, you need to restart the related services to have the settings take effect.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the ffs.cfg file with the Notepad.
The contents of the ffs.cfg are shown as follows:
#= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = NSAP =
47000100123F87E0751D (The access node of a network-layer service, that is, the NSAP
specified in the Configuration Applet dialog box during the installation of the UTS-
NetLink 5.2) TSAP = 0200 (The access node of a transportation-layer service. Use
the default value.) SSAP = 0201 (The access node of a session-layer service. Use
the default value.) PSAP = 0202 (The access node of a presentation-layer service.
Use the default value.)

Step 2 Open the ffs.aut file with the Notepad. Add the first two characters of the value of the NSAP at
the last line of the file.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-33

For example, in Figure 3-23 of 3.4.2 Installing the UTS-NetLink 5.2, the value of the NSAP
is set to 47000100123F87E0751D. In this case, add 47 at the last line of the file.

Step 3 Configure the aetable.txt file.

1. The contents of the aetable.txt are shown as follows:
filestore {1 3 9999 1 7} 1 /490100D05926514C01/0200/0201/0202 0 4
agent {1 3 9999 1 7} 0 /490100D05926514C01/2121/2222/3333 0 4 ANON
{1 3 9999 1 7} 0 /490100D05926514C01/2121/2222/3333 0 4

In the aetable.txt file, the parameters are listed as follows:

AP_TITLE AE_QUAL /NETWORK ADDRESS/TSAP/SSAP/PSAP NS TC

Descriptions of the parameters:

l AE_NAME: the name of the entity defined by the user. The name can contain a
maximum of 39 characters.
l AP_TITLE: the ID of an application process. For example, {1 3 9999 1 7}.
l AE_QUAL: a parameter that is used together with AP_TITLE to identify an
application entity.
l NETWORK ADDRESS: Network Service Access Point, that is, NSAP.
l TSAP: Transport Service Access Point
l SSAP: Session Service Access Point
l PSAP: Presentation Service Access Point
l NS: a network service mode. The values are:
0 - indicates the connectionless mode. This is the default value.
1 - indicates the connection-oriented mode.
2 - indicates the TCP/IP mode for the transport layer.
l TC: a transportation mode on the transport layer. The values are:
Class zero = 0. This is the default value.
class one = 1
class two = 2
class three = 3
class four = 4
NOTE

The values of NS and TC vary from cases:

l For the OSI-LAN, NS is set to 0 and TC is set to 4.

l For OSI-WAN, NS is set to 1 and TC is set to 0.

l For OSI-TCP, NS is set to 2 and TC is set to 0.

2. Modify the relevant settings.

The following shows how to modify the settings in the eatable.txt file.

Add the following content to the file and then save the file.
igwb {1 3 9999 1 7} 1 /47000100123F87E0751D/0200/0201/0202 0 4

3-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Table 3-3 Example

Parameter Example Description

AE_NAME igwb The name of the entity

defined by the user. The
name can contain a
maximum of 39 characters.

AP_TITLE {1 3 9999 1 7} The ID of an application

process.

AE_QUAL 1 A parameter that is used

together with AP_TITLE
to identify an application
entity.

/NETWORK ADDRESS /47000100123F87E0751D The local NASP specified

in Figure 3-23 of 3.4.2
Installing the UTS-
NetLink 5.2. The value
must be the same as that
specified in the ffs.cfg file.

/TSAP/SSAP/PSAP /0200/02010202 The value must be the same

as that specified in the
ffs.cfg file.

NS 0 Refer to Step 3.

TC 4 Refer to Step 3.

Step 4 Restart the server.

----End

3.4.5 Checking the Installation of the FTAM

After installing the FTAM, check whether the FTAM is correctly installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Programs > Administrator Tools > Services. In the Services window, check
whether the following services are started:
l UTS Provisioning Service
l Vertel FTAM Server
l Vetel Lock Manager

If any of the services is not started, it indicates that the FTAM is not successfully installed. In
this case, reinstall the FTAM. If the services are started, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, type cmd and then click OK.
Step 3 The following information is displayed:
cd \uts_ftam\bin

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-35

fsl -P igwb!c:\

Step 4 Enter the administrator name and password.

The following information is displayed:
C:\UTS_FTAM\bin>fls -p igwb!c:\ Enter initiator ID for filestore igwb :
administrator Enter password : AUTOEXEC.BAT WINNT/
AccChecker/ _NavCClt.Log BillSvr/ arcldr.exe
CONFIG.SYS arcsetup.exe Config.Msi/ boot.ini
Documents and Settings/ bootfont.bin IO.SYS dell/
Inetpub/ flexlm/ MSDOS.SYS fls.txt
Msc_SendBill.ini iGWB-C32B016/ NTDETECT.COM iGWB_Client/
Program Files/ log/ RECYCLER/ ntldr System Volume
Information/ pagefile.sys UTS_FTAM/ state.dat

30 File(s)

If the previous information is displayed, it indicates that the UTS-FTAM7.2 is successfully

installed.

----End

3.5 Installing the iGWB Server

This section describes how to install the iGWB Server on the primary and secondary iGWB
servers.

Context
It is required to install the iGWB Server on both the primary and secondary iGWB servers.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the installation CD-ROM of the iGWB.

Step 2 Run the Setup.exe file from the Server folder.

The Choose Setup Language dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Select English(United States). See Figure 3-25. Click OK.

The setup program is preparing the InstallShield Wizard. The InstallShield Wizard will guide
you through the installation of the iGWB Server. The Welcome dialog box is displayed.

Figure 3-25 Choose Setup Language

Step 4 Click Next.

The License Agreement dialog box is displayed.

3-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Step 5 After carefully reading the license agreement, click Yes.

The User Information dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Enter the user name and company name. Then click Next.
The Select Program Folder dialog box is displayed. See Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26 select Program Folder

Step 7 Specify the program folder. Click Next.

The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed.
Step 8 To change the program folder, click Browse. It is recommended to use the default program
folder. Click Next.
NOTE

The default program folder is C:\iGWB.

The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed. After the files are copied to the relevant folders,
the Automatic Login Setting dialog box is displayed. See Figure 3-27.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-37

Figure 3-27 Automatic Login Setting

Step 9 Enter the workgroup, user name, and password. For example, WORKGROUP,
Administrator, and igwb. Select Enable automatic login and then click OK.
The InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box is displayed.
NOTE

l To enable automatic login to the Windows 2000 Server in the event of system shutdown, muloperation,
or CPU overload and to ensure stable running of the system, it is recommended to select Enable
automatic login in Figure 3-27.

Step 10 In the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box, if it is your first time to install the iGWB
Server, directly click Finish. See Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-28 InstallShield Wizard Complete

3-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

NOTE

l In Figure 3-28, if it is your first time to install the iGWB Server, do not select Config the file igwb.ini and
Start iGateway Bill. Instead, directly click Finish. Then manually modify the format library file and
configure the relevant parameters in the igwb.ini file.
l In Figure 3-28, if you intend to upgrade the iGWB Server, to use the default format library file and use the
default values of the parameters in the igwb.ini file, select Start iGateway Bill and then click Finish. The
iGWB service is automatically started.
l Repeat Step 2 through Step 10 to install the iGWB Server on the secondary iGWB server.

Step 11 Check whether the iGWB Server is successfully installed.

1. Choose Start > Programs > iGateway Bill V300 Server.
The components of the iGWB Server are listed.
2. Check whether all the components are listed.
The components of the iGWB Server include:
l Start iGateway Bill
l Stop iGateway Bill
l Uninstall System

If all the previous items are displayed, it indicates that the iGWB Server is completely
installed. Otherwise, it indicates that the iGWB Server is installed incompletely. In this
case, you need to reinstall the iGWB Server.

----End

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-39

4 Installing and Configuring the iGWB Client

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to install and configure iGWB Client. The iGWB Client can run on
multiple OSs (such as Windows 98 and Windows 2000) that are installed on common PCs. The
required software applications include the OS and the iGWB Client.
4.1 Checklist
This section describes the items you need to check before installing the iGWB Client.
4.2 Installing the iGWB Client
This section describes how to install the iGWB Client.
4.3 Configuring the iGWB Client
To enable the iGWB Client to access the iGWB Server, configure the relevant settings on the
iGWB Client. This section describes how to configure the server list and how to configure the
parameters of the iGWB Client.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-1

4.1 Checklist
This section describes the items you need to check before installing the iGWB Client.

Prerequisite
The iGWB server can be correctly connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether Windows 98 or a later version is installed and is running normally.
If no OS is installed or the current OS is running abnormally, reinstall the OS.
Step 2 Check whether the installation CD-ROM of the iGWB Client is prepared.

----End

4.2 Installing the iGWB Client

This section describes how to install the iGWB Client.

Procedure
Step 1 From the Client folder of the installation CD-ROM of the iGWB Client, copy the Client folder
and all its contents to the client PC.
Step 2 Run the SETUP.exe file from the Client folder.
The Choose Setup Language dialog box is displayed. See Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Choose Setup Language

Step 3 Select English(United Stated) and then click OK.

The setup program is preparing the InstallShield Wizard. The InstallShield Wizard will guide
you through the installation of the iGWB Client. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard
for iGateway Bill V300 Client dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click Next.
The License Agreement dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 After carefully reading the license agreement, click Yes to continue.
The Customer Information dialog box is displayed.

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Step 6 Enter the user name and organization name. See Figure 4-2. Click Next.
The Select Program Folder dialog box is displayed.

Figure 4-2 Customer Information

NOTE

The user name and organization name given in Figure 4-2 are examples only.

Step 7 Use the default program folder. Specify a different program folder if necessary. See Figure
4-3. Click Next.
The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed.

Figure 4-3 Select Program Folder

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-3

Step 8 Use the default destination location C:\iGWB_Client. Or you can click Browse to specify a
different folder. See Figure 4-4. Click Next.
The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed.

Figure 4-4 Choose Destination Location

Step 9 To view the current settings, choose Start Copying Files > Current Settings. See Figure
4-5. Make sure that the current settings are correct. Then click Next. If any incorrect setting is
found, click Back to the related dialog box to modify the setting.

Figure 4-5 Start Copying Files

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Step 10 The setup program starts copying files. In the InstallShield Wizard dialog box, click Finish.

Step 11 Check whether the iGWB Client is successfully installed.

1. Choose Start > Programs > iGateway Bill V300 Client.
The components of the iGWB Client are displayed on a menu.
2. Check whether the iGWB Client is completely installed.
A complete iGWB Client package includes the following items:
l Help
l iGWB Client
l Parameter Configuration
l Uninstall System

If all the previous items are displayed, it indicates that the iGWB Client is completely
installed. Otherwise, it indicates that the iGWB Client is installed incompletely.

----End

4.3 Configuring the iGWB Client

To enable the iGWB Client to access the iGWB Server, configure the relevant settings on the
iGWB Client. This section describes how to configure the server list and how to configure the
parameters of the iGWB Client.
4.3.1 Configuring the Server List
If you intend to log in to the iGWB Server through the iGWB Parameter Config Console or the
iGWB Client, you must configure a list of accessible servers in Office Management. This
section describes how to configure the server list.
4.3.2 Setting the Parameters of the iGWB Client
This topic describes how to set the parameters of the iGWB Client. Typically, you do not need
to set these parameters.

4.3.1 Configuring the Server List

If you intend to log in to the iGWB Server through the iGWB Parameter Config Console or the
iGWB Client, you must configure a list of accessible servers in Office Management. This
section describes how to configure the server list.

Prerequisite
The cfg_proc.exe process is started on the iGWB server.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-5

l IGWB1:
Set the IP address of iGWB1 to the fixed IP address of network interface 0 of the secondary
iGWB server. For example, 129.9.1.3. Through this IP address, the iGWB Parameter
Config Console connects to the secondary iGWB server.
l IGWB_CLUSTER:
Set the IP address of IGWB_Cluster to the external virtual IP address of network adapter
0 of the primary or secondary iGWB server. For example, 129.9.1.1. Through this IP
address, the iGWB Client connects to the primary or secondary iGWB server.

Procedure
Step 1 To start the iGWB Parameter Config Console or the iGWB Client, choose Start > Programs >
iGateway Bill V300 Client
The Login dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the Login dialog box, click Office Management.
The Office Management dialog box is displayed. See Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6 Office Management

Step 3 In the Office Management dialog box, configure the servers. The settings include Office, IP
Address, and Type. See Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7 Configuration of the servers

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

For details about the parameters in the Office Management dialog box, see Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Parameters in the Office Management dialog box

Parameter iGWB Parameter Config Console iGWB Client

Office Mandatory Mandatory

Specifies the office name of the iGWB server Specifies the office name of
maintained on the iGWB Parameter Config the iGWB server
Console. It is suggested to create two offices, maintained on the iGWB
IGWB0 and IGWB1. Client. It is suggested to
create an office named
IGWB_Cluster.

IP Address Mandatory Mandatory

Refers to the fixed IP address of network Set the value to the external
interface 0 of the primary iGWB server. For virtual IP address of
example, 129.9.1.2. Through this IP address, network adapter 0 of the
the iGWB Parameter Config Console primary or secondary iGWB
connects to the primary iGWB server. server. For example,
Set the value to the fixed IP address of 129.9.1.1. Through this IP
network interface 0 of the secondary iGWB address, the iGWB Client
server. For example, 129.9.1.3. Through this connects to the primary or
IP address, the iGWB Parameter Config secondary iGWB server.
Console connects to the secondary iGWB
server.
If the iGWB Client and the iGWB Server are
installed on the same server, set the IP address
to 127.0.0.1.

Type Mandatory Mandatory

Specifies the type of the office. It is suggested Specifies the type of the
to set the value to iGWB. office. It is suggested to set
the value to iGWB.

Step 4 Click Set to have the settings take effect. The newly created office is displayed in the list box.
Click Save to save the settings.
The Login dialog box is displayed.

----End

4.3.2 Setting the Parameters of the iGWB Client

This topic describes how to set the parameters of the iGWB Client. Typically, you do not need
to set these parameters.

Context
For the parameters that do not exist in the igwb.ini file, the iGWB uses their default values. If
you want to change the default value of such a parameter, add the parameter to the igwb.ini file
and set it to a different value.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-7

The parameters of the iGWB Client and their settings are stored in the UICONFIG.ini file in
C:\igwb_client\data. Set these parameters only when re-configuring the ports between the
iGWB Client and the iGWB Server.

CAUTION
If the i3SAFE SIS SetWin2003 or a firewall is installed on an iGWB server, changing the ports
between the iGWB Client and the iGWB Server leads to a failure for the iGWB Client to connect
to the iGWB Server.

Table 4-2 lists the parameters related to the ports between the iGWB Client and the iGWB
Server.

Table 4-2 Parameters related to the ports between the iGWB Client and the iGWB Server

Parameter in the Description Default Parameter in the

UICONFIG.ini File Value igwb.ini File

PORT Port parameter section. - MML

MAINTAINPORT Port for the iGWB Client to 6000 LocalPortToCM

connect to the iGWB Server.

DEBUGPORT Port for the iGWB Debugger 6007 LocalPortToRD

to connect to the iGWB
Server.

ALARMPORT MML alarm port. 6001 LocalPortToAR

CONFIGPORT Port for the iGWB Parameter 56010 LocalPortToCS

Config Console to connect to
the iGWB Server.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the iGWB Parameter Config Console as the config user. On the iGWB Parameter
Config Console, click . Log in to the other iGWB server.

Step 2 On the iGWB Parameter Config Console, in the navigation tree, click MML. In the pane on the
right, check whether any parameter needs to be added.
If the parameters listed in Table 4-2 are found, go to Step 3.
1. If no parameter needs to be added, in the navigation tree, right-click MML and choose
Add Parameter.
2. In the Add Parameter dialog box, check that The parameter's section is MML.
3. In Please select the parameter, select the parameter to be added. Click Add.
In the Added parameters group box, the added parameter is displayed. You can add
multiple parameters to the MML section.
4. Click OK.

In the pane on the right, the added parameter is displayed.

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

If you want to change the value of any parameter in the MML section, in the pane on the
right, select the parameter. For example, to change the port for the iGWB Parameter Config
Console to connect to the iGWB Server, select LocalPortToCS.
Step 3 In the pane on the right, double-click the value of the parameter and change the value.
For example, to change the value of the LocalPortToCS parameter to 56011, double click the
value and change it to 56011.

Step 4 Right-click the LocalPortToCS parameter and choose or to

synchronize the setting to the other iGWB server. Click to save the setting.
Step 5 Log in to the iGWB Client as the admin user. Choose Operation > Switch.
After switchover, the original secondary iGWB server is in active state, the parameter settings
of this server take effect. In this case, you need to re-log in to the iGWB Client.
Step 6 Edit the UICONFIG.ini file in C:\igwb_client\data.
For example, the value of the LocalPortToCS parameter is changed to 56011 on the iGWB
Server. In this case, in the UICONFIG.ini file in C:\igwb_client\data, change the value of the
CONFIGPORT parameter to 56011.
Step 7 Check that you can log in to the iGWB Parameter Config Console and the iGWB Client as the
admin user.
Step 8 On the iGWB Client, choose Operation > Switch to switch services between the two iGWB
servers. Check that you can re-log in to the iGWB Parameter Config Console and the iGWB
Client as the admin user.
This operation enables the parameters configured on the other iGWB server to take effect.

----End

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-9

5 Configuring the iGWB Server

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to configure the iGWB Server.

1. 5.1 Updating Format Libraries
This section describes how to update format libraries.
2. 5.2 Configuring the igwb.ini File
This section describes how to configure the igwb.ini file. After the igwb.ini is configured,
the iGWB application can be started.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-1

5.1 Updating Format Libraries

This section describes how to update format libraries.

Prerequisite
Ensure that the format library used by the office are not the default one. Before configuring the
iGWB Server, update the format libraries.

Context
After the iGWB Server is installed, format libraries are stored in the following two paths:
l C:\iGWB\Config\Format: The default format library is stored in this path.
l C:\iGWB\Config\SpecialFormat: The special format library is stored in this path.

Procedure
Step 1 Identify the format library used by the office. For details, see 2.6 Format Library Planning.
For example, the format library used by the office is 953-118.
Step 2 In C:\iGWB\Config\SpecialFormat, find the format library used in the SOFTX3000 version.
For example, the 935-118 format library is stored in C:\iGWB\Config\SpecialFormat\V3R6.
Step 3 In C:\iGWB\Config\Format, delete all the files.
Step 4 Copy the format library used in the SOFTX3000 version from C:\iGWB\Config
\SpecialFormat to C:\iGWB\Config\Format.
For example, copy the 953-118 format library from C:\iGWB\Config\SpecialFormat\V3R6
to C:\iGWB\Config\Format.

----End

5.2 Configuring the igwb.ini File

This section describes how to configure the igwb.ini file. After the igwb.ini is configured, the
iGWB application can be started.

Context
For details on how to configure the igwb.ini file, see the Configuration Guide.

Result
After the igwb.ini file is configured, the iGWB can be started.

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

6 Installing and Configuring the SmartBackup

About This Chapter

The SmartBackup is used to back up CDR files offline. With the friendly user interface, users
can customize backup tasks according to their actual needs. Before using the SmartBackup, you
need to install and configure the SmartBackup. This section describes how to install and
configure the SmartBackup.
1. 6.1 Installing the SmartBackup
This section describes how to install the SmartBackup.
2. 6.2 Configuring the SmartBackup
To use the SmartBackup to back up CDR files to a third-party server, you need to configure
the relevant settings of the SmartBackup. This section describes how to configure the
SmartBackup and how to back up CDR files.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-1

6.1 Installing the SmartBackup

This section describes how to install the SmartBackup.

Context
The SmartBackup is a subsidiary tool provided by the iGWB. This tool provides remote hot
backup for CDR files through FTP. You may install the SmartBackup on both the primary and
secondary iGWB servers and then back up the CDR files to a third-party server.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Services. In the Services window, right-
click Process Watch Dog Service and then choose Stop.

Step 2 Run the SETUP.EXE file from the installation directory of the SmartBackup.
The Choose Setup Language dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Select the setup language and then click OK.

The Setup dialog box is displayed. The setup program is preparing the InstallShield wizard.
Afterwards, the Welcome dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click Next.

The Software License Agreement dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 After carefully reading the license agreement, click Yes to continue.
The User Information dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Enter the user name and company name. Then click Next.
The Select Program Folder dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Specify the program folder. Click Next.

The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed.

Step 8 To change the program folder, click Browse. It is recommended to use the default program
folder. Click Next.
The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed.

Step 9 Click Next.

The Setup Complete dialog box is displayed.

Step 10 Click Finish.

Step 11 Choose Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Services. In the Services window, right-
click Process Watch Dog Service and then choose Start. Starting the Process Watch Dog
Service also starts the iGWB and the SmartBackup.

----End

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

6.2 Configuring the SmartBackup

To use the SmartBackup to back up CDR files to a third-party server, you need to configure the
relevant settings of the SmartBackup. This section describes how to configure the SmartBackup
and how to back up CDR files.
6.2.1 Basic Knowledge
This topic describes the backup of CDR files through a network, including the CDR files that
can be backed up through a network and the settings of source paths for backing up CDR files.
6.2.2 Backing Up CDR Files with the SmartBackup
This section describes how to use the SmartBackup to back up CDR files to a third-party server.

6.2.1 Basic Knowledge

This topic describes the backup of CDR files through a network, including the CDR files that
can be backed up through a network and the settings of source paths for backing up CDR files.

CDR Files that Can Be Backed Up Through a Network

The iGWB can back up the following types of CDR files through a network:
l Original CDR files
By default, the iGWB stores original CDR files in D:\frontsave.
l First copies of final CDR files
Typically, the iGWB needs to back up the first copies of final CDR files through a network.
By default, the iGWB stores them in E:\backsave\access point name.
l Second copies of final CDR files
By default, the iGWB stores the second copies of final CDR files in E:\backsave
\Second. If the following conditions are met, configure the iGWB to back up the second
copies of final CDR files through a network:
– The iGWB uses the backsave patch and the second copies of final CDR files are not the
same as the first copies of final CDR files.
– The iGWB sends the second copies of final CDR files to the BC in Push mode and does
not delete them immediately after sending them to the BC.

Configuring Source Backup Paths

When configuring the iGWB to follow any rule to back up CDR files through a network,
configure the source backup path as follows:
l For original CDR files
Configure the source backup path as D:\frontsave\access point name.
l For the first copies of final CDR files
Configure the source backup path as E:\backsave\access point name\channel name.
Typically, you need to configure multiple backup tasks.
l For the second copies of final CDR files
Configure the source backup path as follows:
– Configure the source backup path as E:\backsave\Second\access point name.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-3

– Configure the source backup path as E:\backsave\Second\access point name\channel

name. Typically, you need to configure multiple backup tasks.

6.2.2 Backing Up CDR Files with the SmartBackup

This section describes how to use the SmartBackup to back up CDR files to a third-party server.

Prerequisite
Before configuring the SmartBackup, make sure that the following requirements are met:
l An FTP site is created and configured on the third-party server.
The related settings include the read and write permissions of the current FTP user, FTP
path, and directory style (UNIX).
l The iGWB runs normally.
l The links between the iGWB server and the third-party server are normal.

Context
For the basic knowledge of CDR network backup for the iGWB, see 6.2 Configuring the
SmartBackup.
NOTE

Based on each backup task, the iGWB backs up CDR files from only one channel to the related directory
of the third-party server. Also, before backing up CDR files, you need to configure the relevant parameters
of the backup task.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Programs > SmartBackup > SmartBackup. The main interface of the
SmartBackup is displayed. See Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1 Task Manager

6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Step 2 Click Add Task.

The Please set file-sent parameter dialog box is displayed. See Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2 Please set file-sent parameter

NOTE

Parameters with an asterisk (*) are mandatory.

Step 3 Configure the parameters.

For details about the parameters, see Table 6-1 and Table 6-2. The following table shows the
parameters used for backing up CDR files from the detail channel to a remote site.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-5

Table 6-1 Parameters at local

Parameter Description Description and Example

Task name Mandatory. On the SmartBackup, each backup task is

Indicates the backup task configured to back up CDR files of only one
name. channel. Therefore, it is recommended that
the backup task name includes the channel
name. For example, to back up the CDR files
of the Detail channel, it is recommended to
create a backup task, named DetailBackup.

Local Indicates the level of the For example, if the source backup path is d:
directory source backup path where \frontsave\accesspoint, the level (local
depth CDR files are backed up. directory depth) is 2.

Local Mandatory. The following source backup paths are

directory Indicates the source backup provided:
path. l To back up original CDR files, set the
value to d:\frontsave\accesspoint.
l To back up the first copies of final CDR
files, set the value to e:\backsave
\accesspoint\channel.
l To back up the second copies of final CDR
files, set the value to e:\backsave\Second
\accesspoint or e:\backsave\Second
\accesspoint\channel.

Local Mandatory. For example:

filename Indicates the extension of a l If the CDR file is b000000042.bil, set the
extension CDR file that needs to be value to bil.
backed up. l If the CDR file is b00000001.dat, set the
value to dat.
l To ignore the file extension, set the value
to *.

File save Indicates the days during -

days which the CDR files of the
iGWB are stored.
Value range: [0, 365]
Unit: day
The default value 0 indicates
that the CDR files are stored
permanently.

6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Parameter Description Description and Example

Reconnectin Indicates the interval at It is recommended to use the default value.

g server which the destination backup
interval(Sec) server is connected to.
Value range: [0, 86400]
[Unit]: second
The default value is 300
seconds.

File Indicates the interval at It is recommended to use the default value.

searching which CDR files are searched
interval(Sec) in the source backup path.
Value range: [1, 86400]
[Unit]: second
The default value is 30
seconds.

Ftp transfor Indicates the format in which The following cases are provided:
mode CDR files are transferred l To transfer binary CDR files, use the
through FTP. Two formats binary mode.
are supported:
l To transfer text CDR files or ASN.1 CDR
l Binary files, use the text mode.
l Text
The default format is binary.

Local Indicates the local IP address. 130.1.4.2

address

Delete after Indicates whether to delete It is recommended to use the default value.
backup the local CDR files after
backup. The values are:
l Yes
l No
The default value is No.

Startup type Indicates the startup mode of It is recommended to use the automatic
the SmartBackup. The values mode.
are:
l Manual
l Automatic

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-7

Table 6-2 Parameter at FTP Server

Parameter Description Description and Example

Limit of store Indicates the allowed days This parameter indicates the allowed days
time(Day) during which the CDR files during which the CDR files are stored on the
are stored on the FTP server. destination backup server, The number of
If the value is exceeded, the days can be modified according to the disk
CDR files are automatically storage of the destination backup server.
deleted.
If the value of Local
directory depth is set to 2, the
value of Limit of store time
(Day) is displayed on the
interface of the tool.
If the value of Limit of store
time(Day) is set to 0, it
indicates that the CDR files
are stored on the FTP server
permanently.

Ftp directory Mandatory. Set the value to the default FTP path of the
Indicates the destination third-party server. The directory style is
backup path. UNIX.
For example, /backup/detail/.

Server Mandatory. 130.1.4.3

address Indicates the URL address or
IP address of the destination
backup server.

User name Mandatory. The user name is configured during the

Indicates the user name of the configuration of the FTP site on the third-
FTP service on the destination party server.
backup server.

Password Indicates the user password of The user password is configured during the
the FTP service on the configuration of the FTP site on the third-
destination backup server. party server.

Step 4 Click OK.

The Task Manager dialog box is displayed, showing the parameter settings of the current
backup task. See Figure 6-3.

6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure 6-3 Task Manager

Step 5 To start the backup task, click Start.

If the backup task is correctly configured, the backup task can be successfully started. If the final
CDR directory of the iGWB contains CDR files, you can click Debug Info to view the details
of the backup progress. See Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4 Debug Info

Step 6 Check that the iGWB can back up CDR files to the third-party server.
If no CDR file is generated, copy any CDR file to the source backup path to check whether the
iGWB can back up the CDR file to the third-party server.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-9

Step 7 To back up CDR files in different channels, repeat Step 2 through Step 5 to create different
backup tasks.

----End

6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

7 Installing the Anti-Virus Software

About This Chapter

To ensure normal running of the iGWB, you need to install the anti-virus software.
7.1 Installing the OfficeScan
Anti-virus software is an additional tool that you can select to install or not according to your
actual need.
7.2 Installing the i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000
The i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000 is an additional tool that you can select to install or not according
to your actual need. This section describes how to install the i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000.
7.3 Installing the i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000
The i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000 is an additional tool that you can select to install or not according
to your actual need. This section describes how to install the i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-1

7.1 Installing the OfficeScan

Anti-virus software is an additional tool that you can select to install or not according to your
actual need.

Context
The iGWB uses the OfficeScan anti-virus software. For details about how to install the
OfficeScan and how to obtain the license, see the OSCE7.0 TrendMicro Anti-Virus Server
Maintenance Manual.

7.2 Installing the i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000

The i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000 is an additional tool that you can select to install or not according
to your actual need. This section describes how to install the i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000.

Prerequisite
l The iGWB is configured and the iGWB server runs normally.
l The license of the i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000 is obtained.

Context
NOTE

l For details about how to install the i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000 and how to obtain the license, see the
i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000 User Manual. This section describes the important steps on installing the
i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000.
l Before installing the i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000, make sure that the iGWB runs normally.

Before installing the i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000, configure the related settings in the
SetWin.cfg file. This ensures stable and secure running of the iGWB server. Do as follows:

Procedure
Step 1 Replace the copy SetWin.cfg or file under C:\Program Files\huawei\Setwin2000 with the
file under C:\iGWB\Config\security\.
NOTE

l To install a Chinese version, use the SetWin.cfg file.

l To install an English version, use the and SetWin2000_EN.cfg files.

Step 2 In the displayed dialog box, click Yes.

Step 3 Enable a port for the OfficeScan.

CAUTION
If you intend to install the OfficeScan, you must enable a port. If you do not intend to install the
OfficeScan, you can skip this step.

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

1. On the desktop, double-click the SetWin2000 shortcut. The main interface of the
SetWin2000 is displayed.
2. Choose System > Edit Config File.
The Edit window is displayed. See Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 Edit

3. In [SET WIN IPSEC] of the Edit window, add the following commands:

[SET WIN IPSEC] ;-r "Rule name" -n Pass or block (PASS, BLOCK) -f Setting the
rule ;-f example: ;(1) Block the TCP 2938 port of 1.2.3.4 from connecting the
6667 port of the current PC -f 1.2.3.4:2938+0:6667:TCP ;(2) Block a port of a
host in a network segment from connecting a port of a host in another network
segment -f IP/mask:port=IP/mask:port: protocol ; Allow a TCP connection to be
set up between any port of any host and some particular ports of the IP address
(129.9.1.1) of the network port of the current PC; public port -r "trend1" -n
PASS -f 0:4343+*:*:TCP -r "trend2" -n PASS -f 0:*+*:port:TCP

NOTE

l The first command is used to add the 4343 port through which the OfficeScan client can access
the OfficeScan server.
l The second command is used to add a listening port through which the OfficeScan server
communicates with the OfficeScan client. Use the port of the Figure 7-2.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-3

Figure 7-2 Communication port

Step 4 Choose Start > All Programs > iGateway Bill V300 Server > Start iGateway Bill.
If the SetWin2000 is installed and configured correctly, the iGWB server can be successfully
started and the icon is displayed in the notification area.

----End

7.3 Installing the i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000

The i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000 is an additional tool that you can select to install or not according
to your actual need. This section describes how to install the i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000.

Prerequisite
l The iGWB is configured and the iGWB server runs normally.
l The license of the i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000 is obtained.

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Context
NOTE

l For details about how to install the i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000 and how to obtain the license, see the
i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000 User Manual. This section describes the important steps on installing the
i3SAFE SIS .
l Before installing the i3SAFE SIS SetWin2000, make sure that the iGWB runs normally.

Before installing the i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000, you need to update the ppt.ini and
WarnIn.dll configuration files. This ensures stable and secure running of the iGWB server.

During the installation of the iGWB, the ppt.ini and WarnIn.dll files are already configured.
You need to configure the i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000 in the file under the installation path of
the iGWB server. The steps are as follows:

Procedure
Step 1 In the Please select the config file dialog box, select C:\iGWB\Config\security\ppt.ini in
Please select the ppt.ini configured by yourself and C:\iGWB\Config\security\WarnIn.dll
in Please select the WarnIn.dll generated by yourself. See Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3 Please select the config file

Step 2 Complete the installation of the i3SAFE SIS SysPatron2000. For details, see the i3SAFE SIS
SysPatron2000 User Manual and .

Step 3 After installation, choose Start > Programs > iGateway Bill V300 Server > Start iGateway
Bill .
If the SysPatron2000 is installed and configured correctly, the iGWB server can be successfully
started and the icon is displayed in the notification area.

----End

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-5

8 Checking the Installation of the iGWB

About This Chapter

After installing and configuring the iGWB, check whether the iGWB is correctly installed.

Prerequisite
The iGWB is installed and configured.
The relevant anti-virus software applications are installed, are configured, and are running
normally.
8.1 Checking the Process Status of the iGWB Server
This topic describes how to check the process status of the iGWB Server.
8.2 Checking the Connection to the iGWB Client
The iGWB Client can connect to the iGWB Server through the fixed IP address of network
adapter 0 or through a virtual IP address. Maintenance personnel must check the connection
between the iGWB Client and the iGWB Server on the weekly basis.
8.3 Checking the Heartbeat Connection
This topic describes how to check the heartbeat connection.
8.4 Checking the Switchover of the iGWB
On a two-node iGWB, to improve system reliability and prevent service interruption, the iGWB
provides the switchover function. Maintenance personnel must ensure that the primary and
secondary iGWB servers can be switched in both manual and automatic switchover modes.
8.5 Checking the Receiving and Processing of the Original CDR Files
To make sure that the iGWB can correctly receive and store the original CDR files, check the
CDR files generated after a call.
8.6 Checking the Function of Sending Final CDRs
Maintenance personnel must check the final CDR files to ensure that these files can be
successfully sent to the BC.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-1

8.1 Checking the Process Status of the iGWB Server

This topic describes how to check the process status of the iGWB Server.

Context
For details about the processes of the iGWB Server, see Basic Knowledge of the Processes on
the iGWB Server.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of iGWB0 as the administrator user.
Step 2 In the notification area, check whether the iGWB bulb.
The bulb indicates the state of the current iGWB server.
l : indicates that the current iGWB server is in active state.

l : indicates that the current iGWB server is in standby state.

Step 3 Right-click the taskbar and then choose Task Manager to check the processes.

If the bulb is displayed, the following processes are shown in Task Manager.
l ap_proc.exe
l knl_proc.exe
l cls_proc.exe
l om_proc.exe
l cfg_proc.exe
l PWD.exe
l bs_proc.exe (optional)
l mtr_proc.exe (optional)

If the bulb is displayed, the following processes are shown in Task Manager.
l cls_proc.exe
l cfg_proc.exe
l PWD.exe

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

CAUTION
l The number of processes must be the same as the number of access points in the igwb.ini
file.
For example, if APCount in the igwb.ini file is set to 2 and the relevant parameters of
AccessPoint1 and AccessPoint2 are configured, two ap_proc.exe processes are shown in
Task Manager.
l Make sure that the process IDs (PIDs) of the iGWB are not changed. If a fault occurs, the
monitoring process may start the faulty process repeatedly. In this case, the PID is changed
again and again.

Step 4 Log in to the OS of iGWB1 as the administrator user.

Step 5 In the notification area, check the iGWB bulb.
The bulb indicates the state of the current iGWB server.
l : indicates that the current iGWB server is in active state.

l : indicates that the current iGWB server is in standby state.

Step 6 Right-click the taskbar and then choose Task Manager to check the processes.

If the bulb is displayed, the following processes are shown in Task Manager.
l cls_proc.exe
l cfg_proc.exe
l PWD.exe

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-3

CAUTION
l In a two-node iGWB, make sure that the primary iGWB server is in active state and that the
secondary iGWB server is in standby state.
l The number of processes must be the same as the number of access points in the igwb.ini
file.
For example, if APCount in the igwb.ini file is set to 2 and the relevant parameters of
AccessPoint1 and AccessPoint2 are configured, two ap_proc.exe processes are shown in
Task Manager.
l Make sure that the PID of the iGWB are not changed. If a fault occurs, the monitoring process
may start the faulty process repeatedly. In this case, the PID is changed again and again.

----End

8.2 Checking the Connection to the iGWB Client

The iGWB Client can connect to the iGWB Server through the fixed IP address of network
adapter 0 or through a virtual IP address. Maintenance personnel must check the connection
between the iGWB Client and the iGWB Server on the weekly basis.

Context
Generally, the server list includes the following servers:
l IGWB0:
Set the IP address of iGWB0 to the fixed IP address of network interface 0 of the primary
iGWB server. For example, 129.9.1.2. Through this IP address, the iGWB Parameter
Config Console connects to the primary iGWB server.
l IGWB1:
Set the IP address of iGWB1 to the fixed IP address of network interface 0 of the secondary
iGWB server. For example, 129.9.1.3. Through this IP address, the iGWB Parameter
Config Console connects to the secondary iGWB server.
l IGWB_CLUSTER:
Set the IP address of IGWB_Cluster to the external virtual IP address of network adapter
0 of the primary or secondary iGWB server. For example, 129.9.1.1. Through this IP
address, the iGWB Client connects to the primary or secondary iGWB server.

Procedure
Step 1 As Administrator, log in to the PC where the iGWB Client is installed.

Step 2 Choose Start > Programs > iGateway Bill V300 Client > iGWB Client.

Step 3 In the Login dialog box, type the user name (admin) and password, select IGWB_CLUSTER
in Office Name, and then click OK to log in to the iGWB Client.
NOTE

If the The Version number is mismatched. Please be cautious in using. message is displayed, uninstall
the current iGWB Client and then re-install a correct version.

8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Step 4 On the iGWB Client, click . In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to exit the iGWB Client.
Step 5 Choose Start > Programs > iGateway Bill V300 Client > Parameter Configuration.
Step 6 In the User Logindialog box, type the user name (Config) and password, select IGWB0 in
Office and then click OK to log in to the iGWB Parameter Config Console.

Step 7 On the iGWB Parameter Config Console, click on the toolbar.

Step 8 In the Add Login dialog box, type the user name (Config) and password, select IGWB1 in
Office, and then click OK to log in to the iGWB Parameter Config Console.
NOTE

Through a fixed IP addresses, maintenance personnel can log in to the iGWB Parameter Config Console
of the primary and secondary iGWB server at the same time.

Step 9 On the iGWB Parameter Config Console, click . In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to
exit the iGWB Parameter Config Console.

----End

8.3 Checking the Heartbeat Connection

This topic describes how to check the heartbeat connection.

Context
Make sure that you have logged in to the iGWB Client as the admin user or any other user that
has the system maintenance permission.

Procedure
Step 1 On the iGWB Client, choose Start > Programs > iGateway Bill V300 Client > iGWB
Client.
Step 2 In the User Login dialog box, select iGWB_Cluster from the Office drop-down list box . Log
in to the iGWB Parameter Config Console as the admin user.
Step 3 On the iGWB Parameter Config Console, choose Operation > State Query.
Step 4 In State Query, query the heartbeat state.
The heartbeat state is displayed in the format of n/m. m indicates the number of heartbeat links.
Generally, the value of m is 2. n indicates the number of normal heartbeat links. If the values
of m and n are different, it indicates that some heartbeat links are faulty.
Step 5 For details about how to rectify the errors occurring in heartbeat links, see the iGWB
Troubleshooting.

----End

8.4 Checking the Switchover of the iGWB

On a two-node iGWB, to improve system reliability and prevent service interruption, the iGWB
provides the switchover function. Maintenance personnel must ensure that the primary and
secondary iGWB servers can be switched in both manual and automatic switchover modes.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-5

Context
The switchover function enables the primary iGWB server and the secondary iGWB server
switch over with each other. After the switchover, the original active iGWB server is in standby
state whereas the original standby iGWB server is in active state. Two switchover modes are
provided:

l In manual switchover mode, maintenance personnel have to manually switch the primary
and secondary iGWB servers. This mode is used during the process of maintenance or
version upgrade.
l In automatic switchover mode, when the primary iGWB server is faulty, the primary and
secondary iGWB servers are automatically switched.
NOTE

The primary iGWB server takes a higher priority over the secondary iGWB server. Therefore, when the
secondary iGWB server is restarted, the primary and secondary iGWB servers are switched over. However,
when the primary iGWB server is restarted, the primary and secondary iGWB servers are not switched
over.

When the maintenance personnel manually switch the primary and secondary iGWB servers,
the Manual Switchover of iGWB alarm is generated on the active iGWB server.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the primary iGWB server as Administrator. In the notification area, check the bulb.

iGWB0 refers to the primary iGWB server and iGWB1 refers to the secondary iGWB server.

If the bulb is on ( ), it indicates that the current iGWB server is in active state. If the bulb is
off ( ), it indicates that the current iGWB server is in standby state.

Step 2 As Administrator, log in to the PC where the iGWB Client is installed.

CAUTION
The switchover of the primary and secondary iGWB servers is risky. It is recommended to
perform the switchover when the traffic volume is low.
To check the automatic switchover of the primary and secondary iGWB servers, make sure to
restart the secondary iGWB server.
l When the primary iGWB server is in active state and the secondary iGWB server is in standby
state, perform the following steps.
l For the case where the secondary iGWB server is in active state and the primary iGWB server
is in standby state, switch Step 4 and Step 7.

Step 3 In the User Login dialog box, type the user name (admin) and password, select
IGWB_CLUSTER in Office, then click OK to log in to the iGWB Client on the primary iGWB.

Step 4 Choose Operation > Switch. In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to confirm the manual
switchover.

Step 5 In the status bar, ensure that the iGWB Client is disconnected.

8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Step 6 Click and then log in to the iGWB Client of the secondary iGWB server as admin.
Step 7 Choose Operation > Reset iGWB. In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to confirm the restart.
The primary and secondary iGWB servers are switched.
Step 8 In the status bar, ensure that the iGWB Client is disconnected.

Step 9 Click and then log in to the iGWB Client as admin. In the status bar, ensure that the iGWB
Client is connected.
Log in to the original active iGWB server to ensure that the two iGWB servers are switched to
original states.

----End

8.5 Checking the Receiving and Processing of the Original

CDR Files
To make sure that the iGWB can correctly receive and store the original CDR files, check the
CDR files generated after a call.

Prerequisite
To perform the checking, maintenance personnel need to work with the softswitch operators.

Context
If the original CDRs from the CDR processing module contain errors (such as incorrect CDR
lengths, incorrect CDR types, and duplicate CDRs), or errors occur when the original CDRs are
coded or encoded, the iGWB generates the Abnormal iGWB CDR alarm.

Procedure
Step 1 Softswitch operators must configure two testing numbers, record the types of the generated CDR
files, and initiate a call.
Step 2 Log in to the iGWB Client as admin. Choose View > Refresh or press F5.
Step 3 In the navigation tree, expand the node of an original CDR file and then double-click a date
node.
For example, the 20070923 folder stores the CDR files that were generated on September 23,
2007.
Step 4 Double-click the CDR file that was lastly generated. In the Choose Bill Format For File
Brow dialog box, select the CDR type recorded in Step 1 and then click OK. In the displayed
dialog box, ensure that the CDR files generated in Step 1 are displayed.
Step 5 Double-click a CDR file. In the Bill Detailed Information dialog box, check whether the
relevant information is correct. The information include the caller, callee, call duration, and CDR
type.
Step 6 Click OK to close the Bill Detailed Information dialog box.
Step 7 In the Final Bill navigation tree, select the related channel. Double-click the date node to check
the largest CDR serial number.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-7

For example, the channel names are detail. For details about how to configure a channel name,
see the iGWB Configuration Guide.

Step 8 On the iGWB Client, choose Operation > Trigger File Closing.

Step 9 In the Final Bill navigation tree, select the related channel. Double-click the date node to check
the largest CDR serial number.

If the CDR serial number is 1 larger than that obtained in Step 7, it indicates that a new final
CDR file is manually generated.

Some CDR files that are automatically generated may be blank CDR files, that is, the sizes of
these CDR files are 0 KB. The reasons of blank CDR files are:
l The iGWB is configured to generate final CDR files at a specified time.
l The iGWB is configured to generate final CDR files.

Step 10 Check the related information, including the caller, callee, call duration, and CDR type.

Step 11 Check whether CDR files exist in E:\backsave\accesspoint\default.

NOTE

The default access point is X3KF.

The CDR files generated in the default folder by the softswitch cannot be sorted by the iGWB.If CDR
files are increasingly generated in E:\backsave\accesspoint\default, contact the local office of Huawei.

----End

Postrequisite
For details about how to handle alarms, see the iGWB Troubleshooting.

8.6 Checking the Function of Sending Final CDRs

Maintenance personnel must check the final CDR files to ensure that these files can be
successfully sent to the BC.

Prerequisite
To perform the checking, maintenance personnel need to work with the softswitch operators.

Context
If the BC does not fetch the CDR files from the monitoring directory for a long time, the
iGWB generates the Billing Center Not Fetch iGWB CDRs for a Long Time alarm.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the BC. Check whether the contents and number of the CDR files received on the BC
are consistent with those on the iGWB.

Step 2 Check whether the BC can parse the CDR files from the iGWB and generate the required final
CDR files.

----End

8-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Postrequisite
For details about how to handle alarms, see the iGWB Troubleshooting.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-9

9 Backing Major Files

This chapter describes the major files of the iGWB and the procedure for backing up the major
files.

Context
After checking the installation and the configuration of the iGWB, you need to back up the major
files or folders of the iGWB. The following files or folders are examples:
l C:\igwb
l D:\StatusFile
l D:\other
l E:\StatusFileB
l (Optional) C:\BillSvr\bin\Config\smartbackup.ini

Procedure
Back up the major files of the iGWB, including the files in the installation folder of the
iGWB, the status files, and the configuration files of related tool software.
Table 9-1 lists the items to be backed up.

Table 9-1 Items to be backed up

Item Path Backup Operation

igwb C:\ In D:\, create the igwb_bak folder. Then

back up the igwb folder in C:\ to D:
\igwb_bak.

Status files D:\StatusFile and E: Back up the StatusFile folder in D:\to D:

\StatusFileB \igwb_bak. Back up the StatusFileB folder
in E:\ to D:\igwb_bak.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-1

Item Path Backup Operation

Data such as user D:\other Back up the other folder in D:\ to D:

information, alarms, \igwb_bak.
logs, and
performance
information

UICONFIG.ini C:\iGWB_Client Back up the Data folder in C:

\Data \iGWB_Client to D:\igwb_bak.

smartbackup.ini C:\BillSvr\bin Back up the smartbackup.ini file only when

\Config using the SmartBackup.

----End

9-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

10 Upgrading the iGWB

About This Chapter

During office deployment or in other special cases, you may need to upgrade the iGWB. This
section describes how to upgrade the iGWB.
10.1 Basic Knowledge of Upgrading the iGWB
This section describes the upgrade modes and the concept of upgrading the iGWB.
10.2 Selecting the Upgrade Mode
The iGWB provides two upgrade modes: smooth upgrade and non-smooth upgrade. Before
performing an upgrade, you need to determine which upgrade mode to use. This section describes
how to select the upgrade mode.
10.3 Procedure for Smooth Upgrade of the iGWB
This section describes the procedure for smooth upgrade of the iGWB.
10.4 Procedure for Non-Smooth Upgrade of the iGWB
This section describes the procedure for non-smooth upgrade of the iGWB

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-1

10.1 Basic Knowledge of Upgrading the iGWB

This section describes the upgrade modes and the concept of upgrading the iGWB.
The iGWB supports two upgrade modes:
l Smooth upgrade
l Non-smooth upgrade

Smooth Upgrade
In smooth upgrade mode, the iGWB is upgraded through switchover between the primary and
secondary iGWB servers. During smooth upgrade, the services of the iGWB are not interrupted.

Non-Smooth Upgrade
In non-smooth upgrade mode, the services of the iGWB must be stopped before upgrade. Also,
you may need to configure the related system parameters of the iGWB and the format library.

10.2 Selecting the Upgrade Mode

The iGWB provides two upgrade modes: smooth upgrade and non-smooth upgrade. Before
performing an upgrade, you need to determine which upgrade mode to use. This section describes
how to select the upgrade mode.

Context
You can determine the upgrade mode based on the following information:
l Whether new channels are customized by the office before upgrade.
l Whether the interfaces between the SOFTX3000 and the iGWB are modified before and
after upgrade.
Figure 10-1 shows the procedure for selecting the upgrade mode.

10-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure 10-1 Procedure for selecting the upgrade mode

Start

Yes
Does the office configure new
channels before upgrade?

Yes Are the interfaces between the

iGWB and the softswitch changed
before and after upgrade?

Use non-smooth upgrade Use smooth upgrade

End

Description:

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether new channels are customized by the office before upgrade.
1. If the user has created some special channels in the previous version of the iGWB, to use
these customized channels after upgrade, the user must check for these channels.
If the user cannot check for these channels, the user can continue with the next step to check.
2. Compare the format library channel file in C:\igwb\config\format with the format library
channel file in C:\igwb\config\specialformat. If the two files are different, it indicates that
new channels are customized by the user. If the two files are the same, it indicates that no
new channel is customized by the user.
Based on the revision history and the readme.txt files of the two format libraries, check
whether the two format libraries are the same.

Step 2 Check whether the interfaces between the SOFTX3000 and the iGWB are modified before and
after upgrade.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-3

Generally, if the R version is not modified before or after the softswitch is upgraded, it indicates
that the interfaces are not modified.
Step 3 Based on the previous items, select the upgrade mode.
For details about how to select the upgrade mode, see Table 10-1.

Table 10-1 Selecting the upgrade mode

Description of the Current Office Upgrade Mode

The interfaces are not modified. No new Smooth upgrade

channels are customized.

The interfaces are not modified, but new Non-smooth upgrade

channels are customized.

The interfaces are modified, but no new Non-smooth upgrade

channels are customized.

The interfaces are modified and new channels Non-smooth upgrade

are customized.

----End

10.3 Procedure for Smooth Upgrade of the iGWB

This section describes the procedure for smooth upgrade of the iGWB.
To ensure that no services of the iGWB are interrupted during smooth upgrade, upgrade the
standby iGWB server, manually switch to the other iGWB server, and then upgrade that
iGWB server. In the example given in this section, the secondary iGWB server is in standby
state and the primary iGWB server is in active state. See Figure 10-2.

10-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure 10-2 Procedure for smooth upgrade

Start

Check the running status of the Upgrade the primary iGWB server
primary and secondary iGWB servers
Stop the processes and services on
the primary iGWB server
Stop the processes and services on
the secondary iGWB server
Back up the files and data on the
primary iGWB server

Back up the files and data on the

secondary iGWB server
Uninstall the iGWB Server in the
previous version
Uninstall the iGWB Server in the
previous version

Delete the installation folder of the

iGWB Server
Delete the installation folder of the
iGWB Server

Install the iGWB Server in the latest

Install the iGWB Server in the latest version
version

(Optional) Copy the filtering file from

the secondary iGWB server
(Optional) Configure the filtering file

Copy the format libraries from the

Configure format libraries secondary iGWB server

Configure the iGWB Server

Perform a switchover
Perform a switchover

Check the upgrade of the iGWB

Check the upgrade of the iGWB Server
Server

Upgrade the secondary iGWB server End

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-5

10.4 Procedure for Non-Smooth Upgrade of the iGWB

This section describes the procedure for non-smooth upgrade of the iGWB
Before non-smooth upgrade, the services of the iGWB must be stopped. Therefore, you can
upgrade the primary and secondary iGWB servers at the same time. Figure 10-3 shows the
procedure for non-smooth upgrade.

10-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure 10-3 Procedure for non-smooth upgrade

Start

Check the running status of the

primary and secondary iGWB servers

Stop the processes and services on

the secondary iGWB server

Stop the processes and services on

the primary iGWB server

Back up the files and data on the

primary and secondary iGWB servers

Uninstall the iGWB Server in the

previous version on the primary and
secondary iGWB servers

Install the iGWB Server in the latest

version on the primary and secondary
iGWB servers

(Optional) Configure the filtering file

on the primary and secondary iGWB
servers

Configure format libraries on the

primary and secondary iGWB servers

Configure the iGWB Server on the

primary and secondary iGWB servers

Start the secondary iGWB server

Start the primary iGWB server

Check the upgrade of the iGWB

Server

End

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-7

10-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

11 Uninstalling the iGWB Server and the

iGWB Client.

About This Chapter

This section describes how to uninstall the iGWB Server and the iGWB Client.
1. 11.1 Preparations
Before uninstalling the iGWB Server and the iGWB Client, be sure to back up the important
files, folders, and CDR files.
2. 11.2 Uninstalling the iGWB Server
This section describes how to uninstall the iGWB Server.
3. 11.3 Uninstalling the iGWB Client
This section describes how to uninstall the iGWB Client.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11-1

11.1 Preparations
Before uninstalling the iGWB Server and the iGWB Client, be sure to back up the important
files, folders, and CDR files.

Context
Before uninstalling the iGWB Server, be sure to back up the important files, folders, and CDR
files. Before uninstalling the iGWB Client, be sure to back up the configuration files.

Procedure
Step 1 The related processes and services of the iGWB are stopped.
1. Choose Start > Programs > Administrator Tools > Services.
The Services window is displayed.
2. In the Services window, right-click Process Watch Dog Service and then click Stop. Then
right-click Cfg Server Service and choose Stop.
3. Choose Start > Programs > iGateway BILL V300 Server > Stop iGateway Bill.
Step 2 Manually back up the files under the installation path of the iGWB, CDR files, and status files.
NOTE

The iGWB supports manual file backup and automatic file backup. In automatic file backup mode, the
iGWB cannot back up CDR files.

The following table lists the backup items of the iGWB Server

Table 11-1 Backup items of the iGWB Server

Item Description

Installation directory of the Copy C:\igwb and all its contents to D:\igwb_bak.
iGWB, C:\igwb

CDR files You can select to back up the necessary CDR files. It is
recommended to back up the CDR files to other devices or
PCs. The original CDR files are stored in D:\frontsave and
the final CDR files are stored in E:\backsave.

Status files Copy D:\StatusFile and all its contents to D:\igwb_bak.

Also, copy E:\StatusFileB and all its contents to D:
\igwb_bak.

Other files Copy D:\other and all its contents to D:\igwb_bak.

11-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Table 11-2 Backup items of the iGWB Client

Item Description

Configuration file of the Copy the UICONFIG.ini file from C:\iGWB_Client\Data

iGWB Client, to D:\igwb_bak.
UICONFIG.ini

----End

11.2 Uninstalling the iGWB Server

This section describes how to uninstall the iGWB Server.

Prerequisite
The iGWB Server is stopped.

Context
The important files and folders are backed up. For details, see 11.1 Preparations.

CAUTION
Before uninstalling the iGWB, make sure that the Services window is closed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Programs > iGateway Bill V300 Server > Uninstall System.
The system start unintalling the iGWB Server. The Question dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Click Yes to back up the related files of the iGWB. If you have already backed up the related
files and folders, click No.
The Confirm Uninstall dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click OK.

The Setup Status dialog box is displayed, showing the uninstallation process.

Step 4 In the Maintenance Complete dialog box, click Finish to complete the uninstallation.

----End

11.3 Uninstalling the iGWB Client

This section describes how to uninstall the iGWB Client.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11-3

Context

CAUTION
Before uninstalling the iGWB Client, make sure that all client programs are closed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Programs > iGateway Bill V300 Client > Uninstall System.
The Confirm Uninstall dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click OK.
The Setup Status dialog box is displayed, showing the uninstallation process.
Step 3 In the Maintenance Complete dialog box, click Finish to complete the uninstallation.

----End

11-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

A Installing an OS on a Dell 2950 Server

This appendix describes the hardware of a Dell 2950 server and the procedure for installing an
OS on a Dell 2950 server.
A.1 Installation Process
This section describes the process of installing the OS on a Dell 2950 server.
A.2 Installation Planning
This section describes the installation planning such as IP address planning, user planning, and
partition planning. After reading this section, you can easily and quickly install the OS and
configure it to meet the requirements of the iGWB.
A.3 Installation Prerequisites
This section describes the installation prerequisites such as checking the software and hardware
of a Dell 2950 server.
A.4 Hardware Installation
This section describes the hardware of a DELL 2950 server and the cable connections of the
iGWB. Before connecting the cables, you need to complete the installation of a cabinet and the
components in the cabinet.
A.5 Installing and Configuring Windows 2000 Server
This section describes how to install and configure Windows 2000 Server on a iGWB server.
A.6 Installing the OpenManage
This section describes how to install the OpenManage, which is used to monitor the hardware
of a DELL server. The OpenManage is a type of server agent software, independent from the
iGWB software. It is delivered with a DELL server.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-1

A.1 Installation Process

This section describes the process of installing the OS on a Dell 2950 server.

Figure A-1 shows the process of installing a Dell 2950 server.

Figure A-1 Process of installing a Dell 2950 server

1. Hardware Start
installation

Install a cabinet and its internal

components

Connect cables

2. OS installation Configure hard disks as

and configuration RAID 5+hot spare

Install Windows 2000 Server

Install hotfixes for Windows

2000 Server

Install network adapter drivers

Configure partitions

Configure the IP addresses of

network interfaces

End

NOTE

For details about how to install a cabinet and its internal components, see the Hardware Installation for
the SOFTX3000.

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

A.2 Installation Planning

This section describes the installation planning such as IP address planning, user planning, and
partition planning. After reading this section, you can easily and quickly install the OS and
configure it to meet the requirements of the iGWB.
A.2.1 IP Address Planning
Before installing the iGWB, you need to plan IP addresses according to the requirements of the
office. This section describes the principles of configuring IP addresses and related precautions.
This section also provides suggested IP addresses.
A.2.2 User Planning
The iGWB involves multiple types of users, such as the OS user on an iGWB server, the OS
user on an MT, the FTP user on a BS, the administrator of the iGWB, and the normal user of
the iGWB. Before installing the iGWB, you need to plan users.
A.2.3 Partition Planning
This section describes the planning for the partitions of the disks on an iGWB server.

A.2.1 IP Address Planning

If any network adapter name is inconsistent with that listed in Table A-1, reconfigure the network adapter
name. For details, see A.5.6 Configuring Network Adapters in A Installing an OS on a Dell 2950
Server, B.5.5 Configuring Network Adapters in B Installing an OS on an IBM x3650 Server, C.5.8
Configuring Network Adapters in C Installing an OS on an IBM x3650T Server, orD.5.7 Configuring
Network Adapters in D Installing HP ProLiant DL380 G5 Server.

Table A-1 Planned IP addresses

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP
Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Primary iGWB Network This network 129.9.1.2/ 129.9.1.1

server iGWB0 adapter 0 to adapter 255.255.255.0
office LAN connects
iGWB0 to an
MT and
functions as an
NMS interface.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-3

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Network This network 130.1.3.1/ 172.30.200.1

Network This network Configure the Do not

adapter 3 to BC adapter fixed IP address configure the
connects or the subnet virtual IP
iGWB0 to a BC mask according address.
and functions as to actual
a charging situations.
interface.

A-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Secondary Network This network 129.9.1.3/ 129.9.1.1

iGWB server adapter 0 to adapter 255.255.255.0
iGWB1 office LAN connects
iGWB1 to an
MT and
functions as an
NMS interface.

Network This network 130.1.3.2/ 172.30.200.1

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-5

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Network This network Configure the Do not

adapter 3 to BC adapter fixed IP address configure the
connects or the subnet virtual IP
iGWB1 to a BC mask according address.
and functions as to actual
a charging situations.
interface.

NOTE

l The iGWB communicates with other NEs, except a BC, through virtual IP addresses. The fixed IP
addresses are masked externally.
l Negotiate with the BC about the fixed IP address used by the iGWB to communicate with the BC.

l Configure the fixed IP addresses of the network adapters according to actual situations. Ensure that
these fixed IP addresses are consistent with those specified in the igwb.ini file.
l You cannot configure the virtual IP addresses of the network adapters manually. You must configure
these virtual IP addresses in the igwb.ini file.
l Network adapter 0 connects an iGWB server to an MT or an NMS. Configure the fixed and virtual IP
addresses of network adapter 0 according to actual situations.

A.2.2 User Planning

See Table A-2 and plan OS users. See Table A-3 and plan iGWB users.

Table A-2 Planned OS users

User Role Description User Name Password

Administrator An administrator has administrator The default password

all the permissions. is igwb.

FTP user A BS accesses the BS is recommended. BS is recommended.

A-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

User Role Description User Name Password

The iGWB transfers The user name is

CDR files to a BS as configured by the
an FTP user. This BS.
user is created by the
BS. The BS needs to
notify the iGWB of
the user name.

An iGWB server You need to

The iGWB backs up The user name is

Table A-3 Planned iGWB users

User Role Description User Name Password

iGWB administrator An administrator of l admin The password is left

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-7

A.2.3 Partition Planning

This section describes the planning for the partitions of the disks on an iGWB server.

The iGWB uses RAID to configure the hard disks of an iGWB server as RAID 5+hot spare or
as RAID 1. According to the requirements of the iGWB Server, you need to divide the disks on
an iGWB server into three partitions and set the drive letters for the three partitions to C, D, and
E respectively. You also need to use the NTFS.

An iGWB server can be an IBM x3650 server or a Dell 2950 server or an HP 380G5 server.
Each IBM x3650 server or each Dell 2950 server or an HP 380G5 server is configured with five
146 GB hard disks. These hard disks are configured as RAID 5+hot spare. Table A-4 and Table
A-6 list the planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650 server or a Dell 2950 server
or an HP 380G5 server. An iGWB server can also be an IBM x3650T server. Each IBM x3650T
server is configured with two 300 GB hard disks. These hard disks are configured as RAID 1.
Table A-5 lists the planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server.

NOTE

The actual disk space may vary from the nominal disk space. Plan the space of drive D and drive E in the
proportion of 1:1.

Table A-4 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650 server or a Dell 2950 server

Partition Size Description

C 10 GB This partition is used to install the OS and the

iGWB Server.

D 214 GB This partition is used to store original CDR

files, log files, and status files.

E 214 GB This partition is used to store final CDR files,

backup files, and status files.

F - This partition is used as a CD-ROM drive.

Table A-5 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server

Partition Size Description

C 8 GB This partition is used to install the OS and the

iGWB Server.

D 146 GB This partition is used to store original CDR

files, log files, and status files.

E 146 GB This partition is used to store final CDR files,

backup files, and status files.

F 64 MB As the flash memory provided by an IBM

x3650T server, this partition is used to back
up the major files such as igwb.ini.

G - This partition is used as a CD-ROM drive.

A-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Table A-6 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an HP 380G5 server

Partition Size Description

C 8 GB This partition is used to install the OS and the

iGWB Server.

D 215 GB This partition is used to store original CDR

files, log files, and status files.

E 215 GB This partition is used to store final CDR files,

backup files, and status files.

G - This partition is used as a CD-ROM drive.

A.3 Installation Prerequisites

This section describes the installation prerequisites such as checking the software and hardware
of a Dell 2950 server.
A.3.1 Checking Hardware
Before installing the OS, you need to check the hardware of each Dell 2950 server. This section
describes the hardware of each Dell 2950 server.
A.3.2 Checking Software
Before installing the OS, you need to check the software of each Dell 2950 server.

A.3.1 Checking Hardware

Before installing the OS, you need to check the hardware of each Dell 2950 server. This section
describes the hardware of each Dell 2950 server.

Context
NOTE

l Because servers are upgraded frequently, the hardware of iGWB servers may vary according to actual
situations. In this case, refer to the packing list.
l The iGWB uses two servers configured with the same hardware. One functions as the primary
iGWB server. The other functions as the secondary iGWB server.

Procedure
Table A-7 lists the hardware of each Dell 2950 server.

Table A-7 Hardware of each Dell 2950 server

Item Configuration

CPU Two Xeon 1.8 GHz or faster CPUs

Hard disk Five 146 GB hard disks configured as RAID 5+hot spare

Memory One 1 GB or two 512 MB memory boards

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-9

Item Configuration

Network adapter Two integrated 1000 Mbps network adapters

Two 1000 Mbps PCI-E network adapters

RAID card One integrated RAID card

Model: DELL PERC 5/i

----End

A.3.2 Checking Software

Before installing the OS, you need to check the software of each Dell 2950 server.

Context
NOTE

l Because servers are upgraded frequently, the software of Dell 2950 servers may vary according to
actual situations. In this case, refer to the packing list.
l The iGWB uses two Dell 2950 servers configured with the same software. One functions as the primary
iGWB server. The other functions as the secondary iGWB server.

Procedure
Table A-8 lists the software of each Dell 2950 server.

Table A-8 Software of each Dell 2950 server

Item Description

Dell PowerEdge Installation and Server This CD-ROM provides the tools for installing the
Management CD OS and configuring a Dell 2950 server.

Dell Systems Management Consoles CD This CD-ROM provides the latest Dell system
management consoles.

Dell PowerEdge Service and Diagnostic This CD-ROM provides the tools for configuring
Utilities CD a Dell 2950 server, the latest diagnostic programs,
and the optimized drivers for a Dell 2950 server.

Dell PowerEdge Documentation CD This CD-ROM provides the latest description files
relating to Dell 2950 servers, Systems
Management Software, peripherals, and RAID
controllers.

----End

A.4 Hardware Installation

This section describes the hardware of a DELL 2950 server and the cable connections of the
iGWB. Before connecting the cables, you need to complete the installation of a cabinet and the
components in the cabinet.

A-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

A.4.1 Structural Views of a Dell 2950 Server

This section describes the structural views of a Dell 2950 server.
A.4.2 Connecting Cables
This section describes how to connect the cables such as power cables, network cables, and C2T
cables of the iGWB. Before connecting the cables, you need to complete the installation of a
cabinet and the components in the cabinet.

A.4.1 Structural Views of a Dell 2950 Server

This section describes the structural views of a Dell 2950 server.

Front View
Figure A-2 shows the front view of a Dell 2950 server without a plate. Table A-9 lists the LED
indicator, buttons, and connectors on the front panel of the Dell 2950 server.

Figure A-2 Front view of a Dell 2950 server

A B C D E F G H

Table A-9 LED indicator, buttons, and connectors on the front panel of the Dell 2950 server
Item Item Name Description

A Power indicator and power When the Dell 2950 server is powered on, the power
button indicator is on. The power button controls the output
power provided by the DC power supply to the Dell
2950 server.
NOTE
l If the Dell 2950 server is installed with an OS that is
compatible with the ACPI, after you press the power
button to power off the Dell 2950 server, the Dell 2950
server is powered off before the power supply is
disconnected.
l If the Dell 2950 server is not installed with an OS that
is compatible with the ACPI, after you press the power
button to power off the Dell 2950 server, the power
supply is disconnected immediately.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-11

Item Item Name Description

B NMI button On some OSs, the NMI button is used to rectify a

software or device driver fault. You can press the
NMI button with an end of a paper clip.
NOTE
Press the NMI button only when a qualified technical
support person or an OS description file instructs you to
do so.

C Server identification button The server identification buttons on the front and
rear panels are used to identify a server in a rack.
When you press a server identification button, the
LCD on the front panel and the server status
indicator on the rear panel blink in blue until you
press the other server identification button or press
the same server identification button for a second
time.

D LCD The LCD is used to display the server ID, status

information, and error messages.
If the Dell 2950 server is running normally, the LCD
is on. Running the Systems Management Software
and pressing a server identification button on the
front or rear panel can cause the LCD to flash in blue
to identify a specific server.

E USB connector The USB connector is used to connect a USB 2.0-

compatible device to the Dell 2950 server.

F Video connector The video connector is used to connect a display to

the Dell 2950 server.

G Hard disk drive Six 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives are
configured on the Dell 2950 server.

H (Optional) CD-ROM drive A DVD-ROM drive is configured on the Dell 2950

server.

Indicators on the Hard Disk Bay

Figure A-3 shows the two indicators on the hard disk bay.
l Drive activity indicator
l Drive status indicator

In a RAID, the drive status indicator is used to indicate the status of the hard disk drive. In a
non-RAID, only the drive activity indicator is used to indicate the status of the hard disk drive.

A-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure A-3 Two indicators on the hard disk bay

A B

A: drive status indicator (in green and amber) B: drive activity indicator (in green)

Table A-10 lists the display modes of the drive status indicator in a RAID.

CAUTION
In a non-RAID, only the drive activity indicator is used to indicate the status of the hard disk
drive. The drive status indicator is off.

Table A-10 Display modes of the drive status indicator in a RAID

Status Display Mode

Identifying the hard disk drive The drive status indicator blinks in green twice per second.
or preparing for removing the
hard disk drive

Preparing for inserting or The drive status indicator is off.

removing the hard disk drive

Predicting a fault of the hard The drive status indicator blinks in green, blinks in amber,
disk drive and then goes out.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-13

Status Display Mode

Indicating a fault of the hard The drive status indicator blinks in amber four times per
disk drive second.

Rebuilding the hard disk drive The drive status indicator slowly blinks in green.

Connecting to the Dell 2950 The drive status indicator is on in green.

server

Quitting rebuilding the hard The drive status indicator blinks in green for three seconds,
disk drive blinks in amber for three seconds, and then is off for six
seconds.

Back View
Figure A-4 shows the back view of a Dell 2950 server.

Figure A-4 Back view of a Dell 2950 server

A: central PCI riser board (in slot 1) B: left PCI riser board (in slot 2)

C: right PCI riser board (in slot 3) D: power equipment

E: server identification button F: server status indicator

G: connector for the server status indicator H: NIC2 connector

I: NIC1 connector J: USB connector

K: video connector L: serial connector

M: (Optional) remote access controller -

Indicators on the Redundant Power Equipment

Figure A-5 shows the indicators on the redundant power equipment. These indicators indicate
whether a power supply exists or whether a fault occurs on the power supply. Table A-11 lists
the indicators on the redundant power equipment.

A-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure A-5 Indicators on the redundant power equipment

A: Indicator for power equipment status B: Indicator for a power equipment fault

C: Indicator for AC power status -

Table A-11 Indicators on the redundant power equipment

Indicator Description

Indicator for power equipment status If the power equipment is workable, the indicator for
power equipment status is on in green.

Indicator for a power equipment If a fault occurs on the power equipment, the indicator
fault for a power equipment fault is on in amber.

Indicator for AC power status If an valid AC power supply is connected to the power
equipment, the indicator for AC power status is on in
green.

A.4.2 Connecting Cables

When connecting a peripheral to a Dell 2950 server, you need to adhere to the following
principles:
l For most peripherals, you need to connect them to dedicated connectors and install related
drivers on the Dell 2950 server. Typically, the drivers are provided with the OS software
or the peripherals. For details about installing and configuring a peripheral, see the
description file provided with the peripheral.
l When connecting the peripheral to the Dell 2950 server, ensure that the peripheral and the
Dell 2950 server are powered off. Unless otherwise noted in the description file provided
with the peripheral, after connection, power on the peripheral before powering on the Dell
2950 server.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-15

Connecting Power Cables

CAUTION
In a non-redundant configuration, to ensure the normal cooling of a Dell 2950 server, before
installing the power equipment on a holder, you need to install the barrier of the power equipment
on the holder.

The input power for a Dell 2950 server is -48 V DC. A Dell 2950 server supports one or two
pieces of power equipment of 750 W rated output power. If only one piece of power equipment
is installed, you need to install the power equipment on the left holder. If two pieces of power
equipment are installed, one piece functions as a redundant hot-swap power supply.

When connecting power cables, connect the positive pole of the power terminal of the Dell 2950
server to the grounding terminal of the -48 V DC power supply. Connect the negative pole of
the power terminal of the Dell 2950 server to the -48 V terminal of the -48 V DC power supply.

Connecting Network Cables

Figure A-6 shows the four network interfaces at the back of a Dell 2950 server. For description
purposes, these network interfaces are numbered from zero to three. See Table A-12. When
connecting network cables, ensure that you connect the network cables to the network interfaces
correctly.

CAUTION
Ensure that the logical numbers of the network interfaces are consistent with the physical
sequence of the network interfaces. Otherwise, the iGWB cannot receive CDRs, you cannot log
in to the iGWB Client to browse CDR files, or the billing center cannot obtain CDR files.

Figure A-6 Network interfaces at the back of a Dell 2950 server

Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch Connecting to a BC

(Network interface 2) (Network interface 3)

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 1)

(Serial port) Primary link between the iGWB and
Connecting to an NMS or an MT
a softswitch

A-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Table A-12 Numbered network interfaces of a Dell 2950 server

No. Description

Network interface on the 0 This network interface connects to an NMS or

left of the integrated an MT.
network adapter

Network interface on the 1 This network interface connects to LAN switch

right of the integrated 0. The iGWB communicates with the primary
network adapter plane of an SOFTX3000 through this network
interface.

Network interface above 2 This network interface connects to LAN switch

the PCI network adapter 1. The iGWB communicates with the secondary
plane of an SOFTX3000 through this network
interface.

Network interface below 3 This network interface connects to a billing

the PCI network adapter center and functions as a charging interface.

NOTE

Number the network interfaces in turn from the left to the right and from the bottom to the top.

Connecting Serial Cables

Use a serial cable to connect the serial ports of the two Dell 2950 serves. This connection forms
the second heartbeat link between the two Dell 2950 servers. Figure A-7 shows the connection
between the serial ports of the two Dell 2950 servers.

Figure A-7 Connection between the serial ports of the two Dell 2950 servers
iGWB1

iGWB0

Connecting C2T Cables

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-17

To save space, the two Dell 2950 servers share a set of KVM switch. Connect one end of a C2T
cable to the KVM switch. Connect the other end to the interfaces of the display, keyboard, and
mouse of a Dell 2950 server. Ensure that the KVM switch is connected to iGWB0 through the
PC2 interface and to iGWB1 through the PC3 interface. Figure A-8 shows the connections of
the C2T cables.
NOTE

The mouse and the keyboard share one USB interface.

Figure A-8 Connections of the C2T cables

KVM switch

PC 4 PC 3 PC 2 PC 1
Connecting to a BAM server
iGWB1

iGWB0

Video cable
Mouse or keyboard cable

A.5 Installing and Configuring Windows 2000 Server

This section describes how to install and configure Windows 2000 Server on a iGWB server.

Context
NOTE

The procedures for installing and configuring the OS on the two iGWB servers are the same. This section
takes the iGWB server functioning as the primary iGWB server as an example and describes how to install
and configure the OS on the iGWB server.
A.5.1 Configuring Hard Disks as RAID 5+Hot Spare
To ensure stable running, the iGWB uses the RAID-5 error tolerance technology. This section
describes how to configure the hard disks of a Dell 2950 server as RAID 5+hot spare.

A-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

A.5.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server

This section describes how to install Windows 2000 Server on a Dell 2950 server.
A.5.3 Install Hotfixes for the OS
For security purposes, you need to install the hotfixes for the OS, released by Microsoft, on each
Dell 2950 server. This section describes how to install the hotfixes for the OS on each Dell 2950
server.
A.5.4 Installing Network Adapter Drivers
Each Dell 2950 server is configured with four network adapters. You need to install drivers for
the network adapters.
A.5.5 Configuring Partitions
You can use the disk management tool provided by Windows 2000 Server to create partitions
and set drive letters on a Dell 2950 server according to the partition planning.
A.5.6 Configuring Network Adapters
Before using the network adapters, you need to check their status, rename them, and configure
the IP addresses of the network interfaces.

A.5.1 Configuring Hard Disks as RAID 5+Hot Spare

To ensure stable running, the iGWB uses the RAID-5 error tolerance technology. This section
describes how to configure the hard disks of a Dell 2950 server as RAID 5+hot spare.

Context
NOTE

If a Dell 2950 server functions as both an iGWB server and a BAM server, you need to configure the hard
disks of the Dell 2950 server as RAID 1. For details about how to configure the hard disks of a Dell 2950
server, see the section describing BAM installation of the Softswitch Software Installation Guide.

A Dell 2950 server is configured with five built-in 146 GB hard disks. To ensure stable running,
the iGWB uses the RAID-5 error tolerance technology.

CAUTION
l Configuring the hard disks of a Dell 2950 server as RAID 5 causes losses of all the data on
the hard disks. Therefore, perform this operation with caution.
l The hard disks of each Dell 2950 server are configured as RAID 5+hot spare before the
iGWB is delivered. Typically, you do not need to reconfigure the hard disks as RAID 5+hot
spare. You only need to check the RAID configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the hard disks are configured as RAID 5+hot spare.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-19

NOTE

When configuring the hard disks as RAID 5+hot spare, you may perform the following operations:
l Press Ctrl+N or Ctrl+P to switch the menu.
l Press Tab to move the cursor to the menu option next to which a plus sign (+) exists. Press the Right arrow
key to expand a menu. Press the Left arrow key to collapse a menu.
1. Start the Dell 2950 server.
If the Dell 2950 server detects a RAID card, the following information is displayed:
Press<Ctrl><R>to Run Configuration Utility

2. Press Ctrl+R. The configuration interface for RAID 5+hot spare is displayed.
3. Press Ctrl+N to choose VD Mgmt. The Virtual Disk Management interface is displayed.
l If the hard disks of the Dell 2950 server are configured as RAID 5+hot spare, the
configuration information about virtual disks, physical disks, and hot spares is
displayed.
l If the hard disks of the Dell 2950 server are not configured as RAID 5+hot spare, the
following information is displayed:
No Configuration Present !
See Figure A-9.

Figure A-9 Virtual Disk Management

A-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

CAUTION
If the hard disks of the Dell 2950 server are configured as RAID 5+hot spare, skip the
following steps. Then go to the steps described in A.5.2 Installing Windows 2000
Server.

Step 2 Press Tab to choose Controller 0. Then press F2. The submenus of Controller 0 are displayed.
See Figure A-10.

Figure A-10 Submenus of Controller 0

Step 3 Press the Up and Down arrow keys to choose Create New VD. Then press Enter. The Create
New VD interface is displayed.

Step 4 Configure the hard disks as a RAID-5 virtual disk array.

1. Press Tab to choose RAID Level. Then press Enter.
RAID levels are displayed. See Figure A-11.
NOTE

RAID levels vary according to the number of the hard disks to be configured.

Figure A-11 Create New VD

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-21

2. Press the Up and Down arrow keys to choose RAID-5. Then press Enter.
NOTE

The minimum numbers of the disks required by different RAID levels are listed as follows: RAID 0
= 1, RAID 1 = 2, RAID 5 = 3, RAID 10 = 4, RAID 50 = 6.
3. Press Tab to move the cursor to the Physical Disks group box. Then press the spacebar to
select the four disks to be configured in turn.
The selected disks are marked with [X]. When the number of the selected disks reaches the
number of the disks required by the RAID-5 level, in VD Size of the Basic Settings group
box, the information about the default RAID capacity is displayed.
NOTE

l For maintenance purposes, use the default value of VD Size.

By default, the value of Advanced Settings cannot be changed. Unless required, do not change the
default value.
4. Press Tab to choose OK. Then press Enter.
A dialog box is displayed, prompting you to initialize the RAID-5 virtual disk array. See
Figure A-12.

Figure A-12 Dialog box prompting you to initialize the RAID-5 virtual disk array

5. Press Enter. The hard disks are configured as a RAID-5 virtual disk array.
Step 5 View the information about the RAID-5 virtual disk array.
1. In the VD Mgmt interface, press Tab to choose Virtual Disk 0. Then press Enter.
The information about the RAID-5 virtual disk array is displayed.
2. Press Esc. The VD Mgmt interface is displayed.
NOTE

l If the RAID-5 virtual disk array is a newly configured disk array, you can initialize it.
l If the RAID-5 virtual disk array is configured for recovering data, do not initialize it. In this case, skip Step
6.

Step 6 Initialize the RAID-5 virtual disk array.

1. Press Tab to choose Virtual Disk 0. Then press F2.
In the displayed submenu, you can choose Initialization to initialize the RAID-5 virtual
disk array, choose Consistency Check to check the consistency of the RAID-5 virtual disk

A-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

array, choose Delete VD to delete the RAID-5 virtual disk array, or choose Properties to
view the properties of the RAID-5 virtual disk array.

CAUTION
Initializing the RAID-5 virtual disk array leads to the deletion of all the data on the hard
disks and the virtual disk array. The deleted data cannot be recovered.

2. Press the Up and Down arrow keys to choose Initialization. Then press Enter. In the
displayed submenu, choose Start Init.. See Figure A-13.
A dialog box is displayed, prompting you to determine whether to initialize the RAID-5
virtual disk array. See Figure A-14.

Figure A-13 Start Init.

Figure A-14 Dialog box prompting you to determine whether to initialize the RAID-5
virtual disk array

3. To initialize the RAID-5 virtual disk array, press Tab to choose OK. Then press Enter.
In the VD Mgmt, the initialization progress is displayed. See Figure A-15. In the Virtual
Disk 0 Prop group box on the right, the current operation is displayed.
When the initialization progress reaches 100%, initializing the RAID-5 virtual disk array
is complete.

Figure A-15 Initialization progress

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-23

Step 7 Configure a hot spare disk.

1. Press Ctrl+N. The PD Mgmt interface is displayed.
The state of a disk is Ready.
2. Press Tab to select the disk in the Ready state. Then press F2.
The menu used to configure the hot spare disk is displayed. See Figure A-16.

Figure A-16 Menu used to configure the hot spare disk

3. Press the Up and Down arrow keys to choose Make Global HS.
4. Press Enter.
The state of the disk changes to Hot Spare. Configuring the hot spare disk is complete.
Step 8 Press Ctrl+N. The VD Mgmt interface is displayed.
The information about RAID 5+hot spare is displayed.
Step 9 Press Esc.

----End

A.5.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server

This section describes how to install Windows 2000 Server on a Dell 2950 server.

Context
NOTE

Before installing Windows 2000 Server, ensure that the Dell PowerEdge Installation and Server Management
CD and the installation CD-ROM for Windows 2000 Server are ready.

Procedure
Step 1 Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to restart the Dell 2950 server.
Step 2 Insert the Dell PowerEdge Installation and Server Management CD in the CD-ROM drive
of the Dell 2950 server.
After a self check, the Dell 2950 server is restarted from the CD-ROM drive. This process takes
about 10 minutes.
Step 3 Select the OS supported by the Dell 2950 server.
1. In the Welcome to Dell Open Manage Server Assistant dialog box, click Click Here for
Server Setup Set up your system to install an operating system.

A-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

2. In the Set the Date and Time dialog box, set the current date, time, and time zone for the
Dell 2950 server. Then click Continue.
3. In the Select an Operating System to Install Select Operating System dialog box, select
Microsoft Windows 2000 Sever Service Pack4. Then click Continue.
The Configure or Skip RAID dialog box is displayed. If the hard disks of the Dell 2950
server are configured as RAID 5+hot spare, the message that the hard disks are configured
as RAID 5 and the disk capacity information are displayed. If the hard disks of the Dell
2950 server are not configured as RAID 5+hot spare, the previous message and disk
capacity information are not displayed.
4. In the Configure or Skip RAID dialog box, select Skip RAID Configuration. Then click
Continue.

Step 4 Create a boot partition.

1. In the Configure the Physical Disk for Microsoft Windows 2000 Sever Service
Pack4 dialog box, in Select the file system for the boot partition, select NTFS-NT File
System. In Select Boot Partition Size, enter 10240. Then click Continue.
NOTE

You are recommended to allocate 10 GB space to drive C.

2. In the Confirm to delete partitions dialog box, click Continue.

Step 5 In the Network Adapter(s) Configuration dialog box, click Continue.

Step 6 Install the OS.

1. In the Enter Configuration Information for Microsoft Window 2000 Server Service
Pack4 dialog box, click Continue.
2. In the Operating System Installation Summary dialog box, click Continue.
The Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Service Pack4 Installation Wizard is started. The
installation progress is displayed. In a few minutes, the boot CD-ROM is ejected from the
CD-ROM drive.
3. Insert the installation CD-ROM for Windows 2000 Server in the CD-ROM drive of the
Dell 2950 server.
In about four minutes, copying installation files is complete. The installation CD-ROM for
Windows 2000 Server is ejected from the CD-ROM drive.
4. In the Microsoft Windows Installation Wizard dialog box, click Finish.
The Dell 2950 server restarts, and then begins to run the installation program of the OS.
This process takes about 10 minutes.
5. The Personalize Your Software dialog box is displayed. In Name, enter huawei. In
Organization, enter huawei. Then click Next.
6. The Your Product Key dialog box is displayed. In Product Key, enter the serial number
of the product. Then click Next.
NOTE

For the serial number of the product, see the surface of the installation CD-ROM for Windows 2000
Server or the description documents provided with the iGWB.
7. The Dell 2950 server continues to install Windows 2000 Server, for example, configure
the network, install program components, install Start menus, register program
components, save settings, and delete temporary files. This process takes about 10 minutes.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-25

8. After installation, a message is displayed. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete. The Dell 2950 server
restarts.

----End

A.5.3 Install Hotfixes for the OS

Context
This section takes KB823980 as an example. To install KB823980 on a Dell 2950 server, do as
follows:

CAUTION
l The hotfixes to be installed on the Dell 2950 server may vary according to actual situations.
In this case, refer to the hotfixes released by Microsoft and confirm the hotfixes to be installed
with the technical support personnel from Huawei. The hotfix and the installation procedure
described in this section are for your reference only.
l Before installing the hotfixes for Windows 2000 Server, ensure that Service Pack 4 is
correctly installed on the Dell 2950 server.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to Windows 2000 Server as an administrator.

Step 2 Double-click the Windows2000-KB823980-x86.exe file downloaded from the Web site of
Microsoft. The Software Update Installation Wizard is started. See Figure A-17. Click Next.

Figure A-17 KB823980 Setup Welcome

A-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Step 3 In the displayed dialog box, select I Agree. Then click Next.
In the displayed dialog box, the message that the hotfix is updating Windows 2000 Server is
displayed. In about 30 seconds, updating Windows 2000 Server is complete. In the displayed
dialog box, the message that the hotfix is installed on the Dell 2950 server is displayed.

Step 4 Click Finish.

----End

A.5.4 Installing Network Adapter Drivers

Each Dell 2950 server is configured with four network adapters. You need to install drivers for
the network adapters.

Procedure
Step 1 On the desktop of Windows 2000 Server, right-click My Computer and choose Properties.

Step 2 In the System Properties dialog box, click the Hardware tab. See Figure A-18.

Figure A-18 System Properties

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-27

Step 3 Click Device Manager. The Device Manager dialog box is displayed.
In Other devices, the detected Ethernet network adapters and RAID cards that cannot work
properly are displayed.
Step 4 Double-click a network adapter. In the Ethernet Controller Properties dialog box, click the
Driver tab. Then click Update Driver….
The Welcome to the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Select No, not this time, and then click Next.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced), and then
click Next.
The Please choose your search and installation options dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 In Search for the best driver in these locations, select Include this location in the search:.
Click Browse. Select the path with the CD-ROM drive letter for the path of the driver file. Then
click Next.
The Dell 2950 server searches for the driver for the network adapter in the specified path. Then
it copies and installs the driver.
Step 8 Click Next. After the installation is complete, the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box is
displayed.
Step 9 Click Finish. The Properties dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The network adapter driver
is updated.
The driver for the first network adapter is installed.
Step 10 Follow the previous steps to install the drivers for the other network adapters and the RAID
cards.

----End

A.5.5 Configuring Partitions

You can use the disk management tool provided by Windows 2000 Server to create partitions
and set drive letters on a Dell 2950 server according to the partition planning.

A-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

4. Click Yes. The drive letter is changed to F.
Step 3 Create an expanded partition.
1. In Disk 0, right-click Unallocated and choose New Partition. In the Create Partition
Wizard dialog box, click Next.
The Select Partition Type dialog box is displayed.
2. In Select the type of partition you want to create, select Extended partition. Then click
Next.
The Specify Partition Size dialog box is displayed.
3. Use the default value to set the partition size to the maximum free disk space. Then click
Next.
The Completing the Create Partition Wizard dialog box is displayed.
4. Check the settings. Then click Finish.
In Disk 1, Unallocated is changed to Free Space.
Step 4 Create logical drive D.
1. In Disk 1, right-click Free Space and choose New Logical Drive. In the New Partition
Wizard dialog box, click Next.
2. The Select Partition Type dialog box is displayed. By default, in Select the type of
partition you want to create, Logical Drive is selected. Click Next.
The Specify Partition Size dialog box is displayed.
3. In Partition size in MB, enter a value, for example, 219136, to specify the partition size
for drive D. Then click Next.
The Assign Drive Letter or Path dialog box is displayed.

CAUTION
Set partition sizes according to the partition planning. The partition sizes may vary
according to server types. For details on how to set the partition, see A.2.3 Partition
Planning.
For example, the partition size of disk D in the DELL 2950 and IBM x3650 server is 214
GB, equal to 210136 MB;
The partition size of disk D in the IBM x3650T server is 146 GB, equal to 149504 MB.
The partition size of disk D in the HP 380G5 server is 215 GB, equal to 220,160 MB.

4. Set the driver letter for the logical drive to be created to D. Then click Next.
The Format Partition dialog box is displayed.
5. Select Format this partition with the following settings: and Perform a Quick
Format. Use the default values for the other parameters. Then click Next.
The Completing the Create Partition Wizard dialog box is displayed.
6. Check the settings, and then click Finish. The Dell 2950 server formats drive D.
Creating logical drive D is complete.
Step 5 Repeat Step 4 to create logical drive E. Allocate all the free disk space of disk 0 to drive E.

----End

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-29

A.5.6 Configuring Network Adapters

Before using the network adapters, you need to check their status, rename them, and configure
the IP addresses of the network interfaces.

Prerequisite

Procedure
Step 1 Check the status of the network adapters.
1. Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network and Dial-up
Connections.
The Network and Dial-up Connections window is displayed. See Figure A-19.

Figure A-19 Network and Dial-up Connections

2. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, check whether the network adapters
are installed successfully according to the network connection icons. Table A-13 lists the
items for checking whether the network adapters are installed successfully.

Table A-13 Items for checking whether the network adapters are installed successfully

Item Result

Check whether each network connection If a network connection icon is displayed

icon is displayed as . as , you can infer that the

corresponding network adapter is installed
successfully and connected properly.

A-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Item Result

Check whether any network connection If any network connection icon is

icon is displayed as . displayed as , you can infer that the

corresponding network adapter is installed
successfully but connected improperly. In
this case, you need to check cable
connections.

Check whether the network connection If the network connection icon

icon corresponding to a network adapter is corresponding to a network adapter is not
not displayed. displayed, you can infer that the network
adapter is not installed successfully. In this
case, you need to reinstall the driver for the
network adapter.

Step 2 Check the correspondence between the network adapters and their names, and then rename the
network adapters.
NOTE

When installing the drivers for the network adapters, the Dell 2950 server searches for the network adapters
and names them Local Area Connection 0, Local Area Connection 1, Local Area Connection 2, and
Local Area Connection 3 in turn. The naming sequence may be inconsistent with the physical sequence
of the network adapters. To correctly identify the network adapters and to prevent improper operations,
before configuring the IP addresses of the network interfaces, you need to check the correspondence
between the network adapters and their names and then rename the network adapters.

The network adapters are installed at the back of the Dell 2950 server. Figure A-20 shows the
connections between the network adapters and other NEs.

Figure A-20 Connections between the network adapters and other NEs

Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch Connecting to a BC

(Network interface 2) (Network interface 3)

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 1)

(Serial port) Primary link between the iGWB and
Connecting to an NMS or an MT
a softswitch

1. Remove all the network cables connecting the network adapters of the Dell 2950 server to
other NEs.
In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, all the network connection icons are

displayed as .
2. Insert the network cable that connects to LAN switch 0 in network interface 2. Ensure that
LAN switch 0 is powered on.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-31

In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, a network connection icon is displayed

as .
3. Right-click the network connection icon and choose Rename. Then rename the network
adapter Network adapter 1 to 0#LAN Switch.
4. Use the same method to rename the other three network adapters.
NOTE

You are recommended to rename the other three network adapters Network adapter 2 to 1#LAN
Switch, Network adapter 0 to Office LAN, and Network adapter 3 to Billing Center respectively.

Step 3 Configure the IP addresses of the network interfaces.

NOTE

See A.2.1 IP Address Planning to configure the IP addresses of the four network adapters on each Dell
2950 server. This section takes network interface 1 on the Dell 2950 server functioning as the primary
iGWB server as an example and describes how to configure the IP address to 129.1.1.1.
1. On the desktop of Windows 2000 Server, right-click My Network Places and choose
Properties.
2. In the displayed window, right-click Network adapter0 to Office LAN and choose
Properties.
3. Double-click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Select Use the following IP address, and then
set the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway parameters as follows:

IP address 129.1.1.1
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway (Set the default gateway according to actual situations.)

4. Click OK.

----End

A.6 Installing the OpenManage

This section describes how to install the OpenManage, which is used to monitor the hardware
of a DELL server. The OpenManage is a type of server agent software, independent from the
iGWB software. It is delivered with a DELL server.

A.6.1 Principle of Monitoring the Hardware

This section describes the principle of monitoring the hardware based on the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
A.6.2 Installing and Configuring the SNMP Service
SNMP-based hardware monitoring is widely used in the field. Before you install the hardware
monitoring software, you need to install and configure the SNMP service.
A.6.3 Installing the OpenManage
The OpenManage is a type of agent software used by a DELL server to monitor its hardware.
This section describes how to install the OpenManage.
A.6.4 Checking the Hardware Monitoring Function
After configuring the SNMP service and installing the OpenManage, you need to check the
hardware monitoring function of the DELL server.

A-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

A.6.1 Principle of Monitoring the Hardware

This section describes the principle of monitoring the hardware based on the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
Based on SNMP, monitoring the hardware is widely used in the industry. The ServeRaid
Manager, Open Manager, and Insight Manager are agent software for servers. They are provided
respectively with IBM, DELL, and HP servers. When a hardware fault occurs, the agent software
sends an SNMP trap protocol data unit (PDU) through SNMP.
The iGWB application provides a format conversion interface between the iGWB and the agent
software provided by supplier. The iGWB application iGateway Bill can detect a hardware fault
on the local computer, generate an alarm, and send the alarm to the NMS or the background
administration module (BAM) . Therefore, the maintainability of the iGWB and the reliability
of the hardware are improved.
The interface between the iGWB and the agent software is provided by the iGWB application
through a dynamic-link library (DLL). Therefore, you do not need to install the interface.
Monitoring the hardware only requires installing and configuring SNMP, TCP/IP, and the agent
software provided by the server supplier.

A.6.2 Installing and Configuring the SNMP Service

SNMP-based hardware monitoring is widely used in the field. Before you install the hardware
monitoring software, you need to install and configure the SNMP service.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Settings > Control Panel.
The Control Panel window is displayed.
Step 2 Double-click Add or Remove Programs.
The Add or Remove Programs window is displayed.
Step 3 On the left of the Add or Remove Programs window, click Add/Remove Windows
Components.
The Windows Components Wizard dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure A-21.
NOTE

Insert the Windows installation CD when the relevant prompt is displayed.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-33

Figure A-21 Windows Components Wizard

Step 4 In the Components drop-down list box of Windows Components Wizard, choose
Management and Monitoring Tools, click Details... .
The Management and Monitoring Tools dialog box is displayed. See Figure A-22.

A-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure A-22 Management and Monitoring Tools

Step 5 Choose Simple Network Management Protocol and then click OK.
Step 6 In the Windows Components Wizard click Next. Then click Finish after installing the
Windows component is complete.
Step 7 Choose Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Services.
In Services, check that:
l The status of SNMP Service is Started and the startup type is Automatic.
l The status of SNMP Trap Service is Stopped and the startup type Manual.

Step 8 Double-click SNMP Service. The SNMP Service Properties dialog box is displayed. Click the
Traps tab, enter public in Community name, and then click Add to list. See Figure A-23.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-35

Figure A-23 SNMP Service Properties

Step 9 Click Add. In Host name, IP or IPX address of the displayed SNMP Service
Configuration dialog box, enter the destination IP address where the trap messages are sent,
that is, 127.0.0.1. Then click Add. See Figure A-24.

Figure A-24 SNMP Service Configuration

The configuration information in the Traps bar is displayed, See Figure A-25.

A-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure A-25 SNMP Service Properties

Step 10 Click the Security tab. See Figure A-26. Then click OK.
NOTE

Under Accepted community names, make sure that the name of Community is public and that Rights
of public is READ ONLY.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-37

Figure A-26 SNMP Service Properties

----End

A.6.3 Installing the OpenManage

The OpenManage is a type of agent software used by a DELL server to monitor its hardware.
This section describes how to install the OpenManage.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the Dell Systems Management Tools and Documentation CD into the CD-ROM drive.
In the Dell OpenMangage Install dialog box, use the default option Dell OpenMangage Server
Administrator. See Figure A-27.

A-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure A-27 Dell OpenMangage Install

Step 2 Click Install.

The Dell OpenManage Server Administrator Version 5.4.0 window is displayed. See Figure
A-28.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-39

Figure A-28 Server Administrator Installer

Step 3 Click Install, Modify, Repair or Remove Server Administrator.

The Welcome to the Install Wizard for Dell OpenManage Server Administrator dialog box
is displayed. See Figure A-29.

A-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure A-29 Welcome to the Install Wizard for Dell OpenManage Server Administrator

Step 4 Click Next.

The License Agreement dialog box is displayed. See Figure A-30.

Figure A-30 License Agreement

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-41

Step 5 In the License Agreement dialog box choose I accept the terms in the License Agreement
and then click Next.
The Set Type dialog box is displayed. See Figure A-31.

Figure A-31 Set Type

Step 6 In the Please select a setup type. dialog box, use the default option Typical and then click
Next.
The Ready to Install the Program dialog box is displayed. See Figure A-32.

A-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure A-32 Ready to Install the Program

Step 7 Click Install.

The Installing Dell OpenManage Server Administrator dialog box is displayed. See Figure
A-33.

Figure A-33 Installing Dell OpenManage Server Administrator

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-43

After about five minutes the Install Wizard Completed dialog box is displayed. See Figure
A-34.

Figure A-34 Install Wizard Completed

Step 8 Click Finish to complete the Dell OpenManage installation.

----End

A.6.4 Checking the Hardware Monitoring Function

After configuring the SNMP service and installing the OpenManage, you need to check the
hardware monitoring function of the DELL server.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Programs > Dell OpenManage Apllications > Server Administrator >
Server Administrator.
l For initial login, perform Step 2 through Step 4. The Dell OpenManage Server
Administrator main interface is displayed.
l If it is not your first time to log in to the DELL server, access the Dell OpenManage Server
Administrator main interface directly.

Step 2 In the Work Offline dialog box, click Try Again. See Figure A-35.

A-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure A-35 Work Offline

Step 3 In the Security Alert dialog box, click Yes. See Figure A-36.

Figure A-36 Security Alert

Step 4 Under Log in, enter the system administrator name and password of the DELL server, and then
click OK. See Figure A-37. The Dell OpenManage Server Administrator main interface is
displayed.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-45

Figure A-37 Log in

In the Dell OpenManage Server Administrator main interface, you can view the information
about the DELL server.
Step 5 Log in to the iGWB debugging console. In the Debuginfo main interface, make sure that the
critical alarm iGWB Disk Failure with the ID of 37 is not generated.
Step 6 Remove a disk from the DELL server. In the Debuginfo main interface, make sure that the
critical alarm iGWB Disk Failure with the ID of 37 is generated.
Step 7 Insert the removed disk into the DELL server.
The critical alarm iGWB Disk Failure with the ID of 37 is cleared.

NOTE

It takes a certain time to restore the data on the disk after the alarm iGWB Disk Failure is cleared.

----End

A-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

B Installing an OS on an IBM x3650 Server

This appendix describes the hardware of an IBM x3650 server and the procedure for installing
an OS on an IBM x3650 server.
B.1 Installation Process
This section describes the process of installing the OS on an IBM x3650 server.
B.2 Installation Planning
This section describes the installation planning such as IP address planning, user planning, and
partition planning. After reading this section, you can easily and quickly install the OS and
configure it to meet the requirements of the iGWB.
B.3 Installation Prerequisites
This section describes the installation prerequisites such as checking the software and hardware
of an IBM x3650 server.
B.4 Hardware Installation
This section describes the hardware of an IBM x3650 server and the cable connections of the
iGWB. Before connecting the cables, you need to complete the installation of a cabinet and the
components in the cabinet.
B.5 Installing and Configuring Windows 2000 Server
This section describes how to install and configure Windows 2000 Server on an IBM x3650
server.
B.6 Installing the Director and ServerRAID Manager
This section describes how to install the Director and the ServerRAID Manager, which are used
to monitor the SNMP service and hard disks.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-1

B.1 Installation Process

This section describes the process of installing the OS on an IBM x3650 server.
Figure B-1 shows the process of installing an IBM x3650 server.

Figure B-1 Process of installing an IBM x3650 server

1. Hardware Start
installation

Install a cabinet and its internal

components

Connect cables

2. OS installation Configure hard disks as

and configuration RAID 5+hot spare

Install Windows 2000 Server

Install hotfixes for Windows

2000 Server

Configure partitions

Configure the IP addresses of

network interfaces

End

NOTE

For details about how to install a cabinet and its internal components, see the Hardware Installation for
the SOFTX3000.

B.2 Installation Planning

B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

B.2.1 IP Address Planning

Before installing the iGWB, you need to plan IP addresses according to the requirements of the
office. This section describes the principles of configuring IP addresses and related precautions.
This section also provides suggested IP addresses.
B.2.2 User Planning
The iGWB involves multiple types of users, such as the OS user on an iGWB server, the OS
user on an MT, the FTP user on a BS, the administrator of the iGWB, and the normal user of
the iGWB. Before installing the iGWB, you need to plan users.
B.2.3 Partition Planning
This section describes the planning for the partitions of the disks on an iGWB server.

B.2.1 IP Address Planning

See Table B-1 and plan the IP addresses.

NOTE

If any network adapter name is inconsistent with that listed in Table B-1, reconfigure the network adapter
name. For details, see A.5.6 Configuring Network Adapters in A Installing an OS on a Dell 2950
Server, B.5.5 Configuring Network Adapters in B Installing an OS on an IBM x3650 Server, C.5.8
Configuring Network Adapters in C Installing an OS on an IBM x3650T Server, orD.5.7 Configuring
Network Adapters in D Installing HP ProLiant DL380 G5 Server.

Table B-1 Planned IP addresses

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Primary iGWB Network This network 129.9.1.2/ 129.9.1.1

server iGWB0 adapter 0 to adapter 255.255.255.0
office LAN connects
iGWB0 to an
MT and
functions as an
NMS interface.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-3

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Network This network 130.1.3.1/ 172.30.200.1

Network This network Configure the Do not

adapter 3 to BC adapter fixed IP address configure the
connects or the subnet virtual IP
iGWB0 to a BC mask according address.
and functions as to actual
a charging situations.
interface.

Secondary Network This network 129.9.1.3/ 129.9.1.1

iGWB server adapter 0 to adapter 255.255.255.0
iGWB1 office LAN connects
iGWB1 to an
MT and
functions as an
NMS interface.

B-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Network This network 130.1.3.2/ 172.30.200.1

Network This network Configure the Do not

adapter 3 to BC adapter fixed IP address configure the
connects or the subnet virtual IP
iGWB1 to a BC mask according address.
and functions as to actual
a charging situations.
interface.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-5

NOTE

B.2.2 User Planning

Table B-2 Planned OS users

User Role Description User Name Password

Administrator An administrator has administrator The default password

all the permissions. is igwb.

FTP user A BS accesses the BS is recommended. BS is recommended.

The iGWB transfers The user name is

CDR files to a BS as configured by the
an FTP user. This BS.
user is created by the
BS. The BS needs to
notify the iGWB of
the user name.

B-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

User Role Description User Name Password

An iGWB server You need to

The iGWB backs up The user name is

Table B-3 Planned iGWB users

User Role Description User Name Password

iGWB administrator An administrator of l admin The password is left

B.2.3 Partition Planning

This section describes the planning for the partitions of the disks on an iGWB server.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-7

An iGWB server can be an IBM x3650 server or a Dell 2950 server or an HP 380G5 server.
Each IBM x3650 server or each Dell 2950 server or an HP 380G5 server is configured with five
146 GB hard disks. These hard disks are configured as RAID 5+hot spare. Table B-4 and Table
B-6 list the planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650 server or a Dell 2950 server
or an HP 380G5 server. An iGWB server can also be an IBM x3650T server. Each IBM x3650T
server is configured with two 300 GB hard disks. These hard disks are configured as RAID 1.
Table B-5 lists the planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server.

NOTE

The actual disk space may vary from the nominal disk space. Plan the space of drive D and drive E in the
proportion of 1:1.

Table B-4 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650 server or a Dell 2950 server

Partition Size Description

C 10 GB This partition is used to install the OS and the

iGWB Server.

D 214 GB This partition is used to store original CDR

files, log files, and status files.

E 214 GB This partition is used to store final CDR files,

backup files, and status files.

F - This partition is used as a CD-ROM drive.

Table B-5 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server

Partition Size Description

C 8 GB This partition is used to install the OS and the

iGWB Server.

D 146 GB This partition is used to store original CDR

files, log files, and status files.

E 146 GB This partition is used to store final CDR files,

backup files, and status files.

F 64 MB As the flash memory provided by an IBM

x3650T server, this partition is used to back
up the major files such as igwb.ini.

G - This partition is used as a CD-ROM drive.

Table B-6 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an HP 380G5 server

Partition Size Description

C 8 GB This partition is used to install the OS and the

iGWB Server.

D 215 GB This partition is used to store original CDR

files, log files, and status files.

B-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Partition Size Description

E 215 GB This partition is used to store final CDR files,

backup files, and status files.

G - This partition is used as a CD-ROM drive.

B.3 Installation Prerequisites

This section describes the installation prerequisites such as checking the software and hardware
of an IBM x3650 server.
B.3.1 Checking Hardware
Before installing the OS, you need to check the hardware of each IBM x3650 server. This section
describes the hardware of each IBM x3650 server.
B.3.2 Checking Software
Before installing the OS, you need to check the software of each IBM x3650 server.

B.3.1 Checking Hardware

Before installing the OS, you need to check the hardware of each IBM x3650 server. This section
describes the hardware of each IBM x3650 server.

Context
NOTE

l Because servers are upgraded frequently, the hardware of IBM x3650 servers may vary according to
actual situations. In this case, refer to the packing list.
l The iGWB uses two IBM x3650 servers configured with the same hardware. One functions as the
primary iGWB server. The other functions as the secondary iGWB server.

Procedure
Table B-7 lists the hardware of each IBM x3650 server.

Table B-7 Hardware of each IBM x3650 server

Hardware Configuration

CPU One Xeon 1.6 GHz or faster CPU

Hard disk Five 146 GB hard disks configured as RAID 5+hot spare

Memory Two 1 GB memory bars

Network adapter Two integrated 1000 Mbps network adapters

Two 1000 Mbps PCI-E network adapters

----End

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-9

B.3.2 Checking Software

Before installing the OS, you need to check the software of each IBM x3650 server.

Context
NOTE

l Because servers are upgraded frequently, the software of IBM x3650 servers may vary according to
actual situations. In this case, refer to the packing list.
l The iGWB uses two IBM x3650 servers configured with the same software. One functions as the
primary iGWB server. The other functions as the secondary iGWB server.

Procedure
Table B-8 lists the software of each IBM x3650 server.

Table B-8 Software of each IBM x3650 server

Item Description

System x3650 Documentation This CD-ROM provides the documents related to an IBM
CD x3650 server.

IBM Director on x86 Version This CD-ROM is used to install the system management
5.2 update 1 CD software IBM Director.

ServerGuide 7.4.13 This CD-ROM functions as a boot CD-ROM. It is used to

install the drivers for an IBM x3650 server.

Broadcom NetXtreme II Gigabit This CD-ROM is used to install the drivers for the
Ethernet Software Ver T 3.0.5 Broadcom network adapters of an IBM x3650 server.
CD

Serveraid 8.40 Support CD This CD-ROM functions as a boot CD-ROM. It is used to

install the driver for the Serveraid 8k/8kl RAID card of an
IBM x3650 server.

Serveraid 8.40 Application CD This CD-ROM is used to install the Serveraid 8k/8kl
Serveraid Manager.

----End

B.4 Hardware Installation

This section describes the hardware of an IBM x3650 server and the cable connections of the
iGWB. Before connecting the cables, you need to complete the installation of a cabinet and the
components in the cabinet.
B.4.1 Structural Views of an IBM x3650 Server
This section describes the structural views of an IBM x3650 server.
B.4.2 Connecting Cables

B-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

B.4.1 Structural Views of an IBM x3650 Server

This section describes the structural views of an IBM x3650 server.

Front View
Figure B-2 shows the front view of an IBM x3650 server.

Table B-9 lists the components in the front view of an IBM x3650 server.

Figure B-2 Front view of an IBM x3650 server

A B C D E F G H I

Table B-9 Components in the front view of an IBM x3650 server

Item Name Description

A/I Lock button on the You can remove the IBM x3650 server from the rack
rack by pressing the lock buttons on the rack.

B Operator information Some controls and indicators are installed on this

panel panel. Figure B-3 shows the controls and indicators
on the operator information panel.

C Activity indicator for If the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive is in use, this

the CD-ROM or activity indicator is on.
DVD-ROM drive

D Eject button for the You can remove a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM from the
CD-ROM or DVD- CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive by pressing the eject
ROM drive button.

E USB port The USB port is used to connect the IBM x3650
server to a USB peripheral such as a USB mouse and
a USB keyboard.

F Video interface This interface is used to connect the IBM x3650

server to a monitor. The video interfaces on the front
and rear panels of the IBM x3650 server can be used
at the same time.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-11

Item Name Description

G Activity indicator for Each hot-swap hard disk drive corresponds to an

a hard disk drive activity indicator. If a hard disk drive is in use, the
corresponding activity indicator blinks.

H Status indicator for a Each hot-swap hard disk drive corresponds to a status
hard disk drive indicator. If a hard disk drive is faulty, the
corresponding status indicator is on in light yellow.
l If a hard disk is being configured as part of a RAID,
the corresponding status indicator blinks once per
second.
l If the controller is identifying a hard disk drive, the
corresponding status indicator blinks three times
per second.

Figure B-3 shows the controls and indicators on the operator information panel. Table B-10
lists the controls and indicators on the operator information panel.

Figure B-3 Controls and indicators on the operator information panel

A B C D E F G

Table B-10 Controls and indicators on the operator information panel

Item Name Description

A Power button You can power on or power off the IBM x3650 server
by pressing the power button. The power button is
covered by a hood. This hood prevents you from
powering off the IBM x3650 server accidentally.

B-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Item Name Description

B Power supply l If the IBM x3650 server is powered on, this

indicator indicator is on.
l If the IBM x3650 server is powered off and
connected to an AC power supply, this indicator
blinks.
l If the IBM x3650 server is disconnected from an
AC power supply or if the power supply or the
power supply indicator is faulty, this indicator is
off.
NOTE
If this indicator is off, you cannot infer that no current exists
in the IBM x3650 server. In this case, the power supply
indicator may have burned out. To cut off all the currents in
the IBM x3650 server, you need to disconnect the IBM
x3650 server from the power supply.

C Activity indicator for If a hard disk drive is in use, the corresponding

a hard disk drive activity indicator blinks.

D Server locator This indicator helps you to quickly locate the IBM
indicator x3650 server among a group of servers. You can use
the IBM Director to turn on this indicator remotely.

E Information indicator If a normal event occurs, this indicator is on. In this

case, an indicator on the diagnosis panel of optical
paths is also on. This helps you to identify the fault.

F Server fault indicator If a server fault occurs, this indicator is on. In this
case, an indicator on the diagnosis panel of optical
paths is also on. This helps you to identify the fault.

G Sliding bolt If you pull this sliding bolt to the left, you can operate
the diagnosis panel of optical paths. The diagnosis
panel is under the operator information panel.
NOTE
The diagnosis panel of optical paths is a component of the
diagnosis system of optical paths. To view the diagnosis
panel, you need to pull the sliding bolt on the operator
information panel to the left and then pull the operator
information panel outward. The indicators on the diagnosis
panel are used to indicate fault types.

Back View
Figure B-4 shows the back view of an IBM x3650 server. Table B-11 lists the components in
the back view of an IBM x3650 server.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-13

Figure B-4 Back view of an IBM x3650 server

A B C D E F

O N M L K J I H G

Table B-11 Components in the back view of an IBM x3650 server

Item Name Description

A Indicator for the If sufficient AC power supply is being provided to the

positive pole of the IBM x3650 server, this indicator and the indicator for
AC power supply the negative pole of the AC power supply are on.

B Indicator for the If sufficient AC power supply is being provided to the

negative pole of the IBM x3650 server, this indicator and the indicator for
AC power supply the positive pole of the AC power supply are on.

C Interface for the This interface is used to connect to the positive pole
positive pole of the of the power cable.
power cable

D Interface for the This interface is used to connect to the negative pole
negative pole of the of the power cable.
power cable

E Ethernet activity If the IBM x3650 server is sending signals to the

indicators Ethernet LAN switch through the Ethernet interface
or if the IBM x3650 server is receiving signals from
the Ethernet LAN switch through the Ethernet
interface, these indicators are on.

F Ethernet link If any link through the 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or

indicators 1000BASE-TX interface is enabled, these indicators
are on.

G Ethernet interface This interface is used to connect the IBM x3650

server to a network.

H USB port The USB port is used to connect the IBM x3650
server to a USB peripheral such as a USB mouse and
a USB keyboard.

B-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Item Name Description

I Video interface This interface is used to connect the IBM x3650

server to a monitor. The video interfaces on the front
and rear panels of the IBM x3650 server can be used
at the same time.

J Server fault indicator If a server fault occurs, this indicator is on. In this
case, an indicator on the diagnosis panel of optical
paths is also on. This helps you to identify the fault.

K Server locator This indicator helps you to quickly locate the IBM
indicator x3650 server among a group of servers. You can use
the IBM Director to turn on this indicator remotely.

L Power supply If the IBM x3650 server is powered on, this indicator
indicator is on. If the IBM x3650 server is powered off and
connected to an AC power supply, this indicator
blinks. If the IBM x3650 server is disconnected from
an AC power supply or if the power supply or the
power supply indicator is faulty, this indicator is off.

M Serial port Use a 9-pin serial cable in this serial interface. This
interface is shared by the IBM x3650 server and the
BMC controller.

N Ethernet interface for This interface is used to connect the IBM x3650
system management server to a system management and information
control network. This interface is enabled when only
the Remote Supervisor Adapter II SlimLine is
installed on the IBM x3650 server. In this case, this
interface is exclusively used by the Remote
Supervisor Adapter II SlimLine.

O SAS port This interface is used to connect the IBM x3650

server to an SCSI peripheral.

B.4.2 Connecting Cables

When connecting a peripheral to an IBM x3650 server, you need to adhere to the following
principles:
l For most peripherals, you need to connect them to dedicated connectors and install related
drivers on the IBM x3650 server. Typically, the drivers are provided with the OS software
or the peripherals. For details about installing and configuring a peripheral, see the
description file provided with the peripheral.
l When connecting the peripheral to the IBM x3650 server, ensure that the peripheral and
the IBM x3650 server are powered off. Unless otherwise noted in the description file
provided with the peripheral, after connection, power on the peripheral before powering
on the IBM x3650 server.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-15

Connecting Power Cables

The input power for an IBM x3650 server is -48 V DC. The IBM x3650 server uses two power
supplies for redundancy purposes. Only one power supply is sufficient for the IBM x3650 server
to run normally.

CAUTION
When connecting power cables, connect the positive pole of the power terminal of the IBM
x3650 server to the 48VIN power terminal of the power supply. Connect the negative pole of
the power terminal of the IBM x3650 server to the OUT power terminal of the power supply.

Connecting Network Cables

An IBM x3650 server provides four network interfaces at the back of the IBM x3650 server
cabinet. See Figure B-5. For description purposes, these network interfaces are numbered from
zero to three. See Table B-12. When connecting network cables, ensure that you connect the
network cables to the network interfaces correctly.

Figure B-5 Connections between the network adapters and other NEs
Connecting to a BC
(Network interface 2) (Network interface 3)
Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 1)

(Serial port) Connecting to an
Primary link between the
NMS or an MT
iGWB and a softswitch

B-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Table B-12 Numbered network interfaces of the IBM x3650 server

Network Interface No. Description

Network interface on the 0 This network interface connects to an NMS or

left of the integrated an MT.
network adapter

Network interface on the 1 This network interface connects to LAN switch

right of the integrated 0. The iGWB communicates with the primary
network adapter plane of an SOFTX3000 through this network
interface.

Network interface above 2 This network interface connects to LAN switch

the PCI network adapter 1. The iGWB communicates with the secondary
plane of an SOFTX3000 through this network
interface.

Network interface below 3 This network interface connects to a billing

the PCI network adapter center and functions as a charging interface.

NOTE

Number the network interfaces in turn from the left to the right and from the bottom to the top.

Connecting Serial Cables

Use a serial cable to connect the serial ports of the two IBM x3650 serves. This connection forms
the second heartbeat link between the two IBM x3650 servers. Figure B-6 shows the connection
between the serial ports of the two IBM x3650 servers.

Figure B-6 Connection between the serial ports of the two IBM x3650 servers

iGWB1

iGWB0

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-17

Connecting C2T Cables

A C2T cable is used to connect a Dell 2950 server to a display, keyboard, and mouse. A C2T
cable consists of a display cable, a keyboard cable, and a mouse cable. These cables are provided
with the iGWB.
To save space, the two IBM x3650 servers share a set of KVM switch. Connect one end of a
C2T cable to the KVM switch. Connect the other end to the interfaces of the display, keyboard,
and mouse of an IBM x3650 server. Ensure that the KVM switch is connected to iGWB0 through
the PC2 interface and to iGWB1 through the PC3 interface. Figure B-7 shows the connections
of the C2T cables.

NOTE

The mouse and the keyboard share one USB interface.

Figure B-7 Connections of the C2T cables

KVM switch

PC 4 PC 3 PC 2 PC 1
Connecting to a BAM server
iGWB1

iGWB0

Video cable
Mouse or keyboard cable

B.5 Installing and Configuring Windows 2000 Server

This section describes how to install and configure Windows 2000 Server on an IBM x3650
server.

B-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Context
NOTE

The procedures for installing and configuring the OS on the two IBM x3650 servers are the same. This
section takes the IBM x3650 server functioning as the primary iGWB server as an example and describes
how to install and configure the OS on the IBM x3650 server.
B.5.1 Configuring Hard Disks as RAID 5+Hot Spare
To ensure stable running, the iGWB uses the RAID-5 error tolerance technology. This section
describes how to configure the hard disks of an IBM x3650 server as RAID 5+hot spare.
B.5.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server
This section describes how to install Windows 2000 Server on an IBM x3650 server.
B.5.3 Install Hotfixes for the OS
For security purposes, you need to install the hotfixes for the OS, released by Microsoft, on each
Dell 2950 server. This section describes how to install the hotfixes for the OS on each Dell 2950
server.
B.5.4 Configuring Partitions
You can use the disk management tool provided by Windows 2000 Server to create partitions
and set drive letters on a Dell 2950 server according to the partition planning.
B.5.5 Configuring Network Adapters
Before using the network adapters, you need to check their status, rename them, and configure
the IP addresses of the network interfaces.

B.5.1 Configuring Hard Disks as RAID 5+Hot Spare

To ensure stable running, the iGWB uses the RAID-5 error tolerance technology. This section
describes how to configure the hard disks of an IBM x3650 server as RAID 5+hot spare.

Context
NOTE

If an IBM x3650 server functions as both an iGWB server and a BAM server, you need to configure the
hard disks of the IBM x3650 server as RAID 1. For details about how to configure the hard disks of an
IBM x3650 server, see the section describing BAM installation of the Softswitch Software Installation
Guide.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the hard disks are configured as RAID 5+hot spare.
1. Power on the IBM x3650 server. If the following information is displayed, press Ctrl+A
to display the IBM ServerRAID Configuration Utility interface:
<<< Press <Ctrl><A> for IBM ServerRAID Configuration Utility!>>>

The operation menus are displayed.

2. Choose Array Configuration Utility > Manage Arrays.
If the hard disks are configured as RAID 5, the information as shown in Figure B-8 is
displayed.

Figure B-8 List of Arrays

List of Arrays
00 igwb0 RAID 5 409.8GB

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-19

NOTE

l In Figure B-8, igwb0 indicates the disk array name. It may vary according to the settings of the IBM
x3650 server.
l In Figure B-8, 409.8GB indicates the default space of the disk array.
3. Press Ctrl+S to configure a hot spare disk.
If the hot spare disk is configured, the information as shown in Figure B-9 is displayed.

Figure B-9 Assigned Hotspare drives

Assigned Hotspare drives

4:00:04 IBM-ESXSVPA146C3-ET 136.6GB

NOTE

l In Figure B-9, IBM-ESXSVPA146C3-ET indicates the model of the hot spare disk. It may vary
according to the IBM x3650 server.
l In Figure B-9, 136.6GB indicates the default space of the hot spare disk.

If the IBM x3650 server is not configured with logical drives or if the hard disks are not
configured as RAID 5+hot spare, the displayed information and the status of the hard disks
are inconsistent with those described in this section. In this case, perform the next step.
Step 2 Check the hard disks of the IBM x3650 server.
1. Press Esc twice to display the Options menu.
2. Choose Disk Utilities, and then press Enter to view the number of the hard disks.
By default, an IBM x3650 server is configured with five 146 GB hard disks. In the Disk
Utilities group box, check the number of the hard disks. If the number of the hard disks is
5, perform the next step.
NOTE

You can expand the hard disks of an IBM x3650 server. An IBM x3650 server can be configured
with a maximum of six hard disks.

Step 3 Configure the hard disks as RAID 5.

1. Press Esc to display the Options menu. Choose Array Configuration Utility > Create
Array to configure the hard disks as RAID 5.
2. Use arrow keys and the Insert key to select the first four hard disks. Then press Enter.
3. In the Array Properties interface, configure the properties of the disk array.
l In Array Type, select RAID 5.
l In Array Label, enter the disk array label, for example, igwb0.
l In Create RAID via, select Auto-sync.
l Check the settings. Press Tab to choose Done. Then press Enter.
4. Press Esc. The Main Menu interface is displayed. Choose Manage Arrays. The
information as shown in Figure B-8 is displayed.
5. Press Enter to view the synchronization progress.
The following information is displayed:

B-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Array Status: AUTO-SYNCHRONIZATION 78%

NOTE

l Synchronizing 409.8 GB hard disks takes about two hours.

l Synchronizing hard disks does not affect the software installation progress of an IBM x3650
server.

Step 4 Create a hot spare disk.

1. Press Esc. The Manage Arrays interface is displayed.
2. Press Ctrl+S to create a hot spare disk.
3. Press Insert to configure the last hard disk as a hot spare disk.
4. Press Enter to create the hot spare disk.
5. In the displayed dialog box, enter Y.
The Main Menu interface is displayed.
6. Press Esc twice to exit the IBM ServerRAID Configuration Utility interface.
7. In the displayed dialog box, enter Yes, and then press Enter.
The IBM x3650 exits the IBM ServerRAID Configuration Utility interface, and then
restarts.

----End

B.5.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server

This section describes how to install Windows 2000 Server on an IBM x3650 server.

Prerequisite
The Server Guide CD-ROM and the installation CD-ROM for Windows 2000 Server are ready.

Procedure
Step 1 Start the IBM x3650 server from the Server Guide CD-ROM.
1. Power on the IBM x3650 server and insert the Server Guide CD-ROM in the CD-ROM
drive. Then restart the IBM x3650 server.
Because no OS is installed on the IBM x3650 server, the IBM x3650 server starts from the
CD-ROM drive.
2. In the Server Guide interface, select a language.
This section takes English as an example.
3. In the Keyboard and Country Selection dialog box, select your keyboard type and your
country. Then click Next.
4. In the Program licensing agreement dialog box, select I accept. Then click Next.
5. In the Welcome dialog box, click Next.
6. In the Select your NOS version dialog box, select Microsoft (R) Windows 2000
Server.
7. In the Server configurations tasks dialog box, click Next.
8. In the Date and time selection dialog box, configure the date and the time. Then click
Next.
9. In the Server configurations tasks dialog box, click Next.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-21

10. In the Clear all hard disk drivers dialog box, select Skip this task. Then click Next.
11. In the Server configurations tasks dialog box, click Next.
The ServerRAID Manager interface is displayed.

Step 2 Check whether the hard disks are configured as RAID 5+hot spare.
1. In the ServerRAID Manager interface, click + next to Localhost (Local system). Click
Controller 1(IBM ServerRAID 8K).
In the Logical devices group box of the Physical devices interface, the settings of the hard
disks and the disk array are displayed. The settings are described as follows:
l Slot4 - Assigned hot spare (140,013BM)
This setting indicates that the hard disk in the fifth disk slot is configured as the hot
spare disk.
l igwb0-Okay (419,700MB)
This setting indicates that igwb0 is in the normal state.
NOTE

In the previous settings, igwb0 indicates the disk array name. It may vary according to the settings
of the IBM x3650 server.
2. Choose File > Exit and return to ServerGuide to exit the ServerRAID Manager
interface.
3. In the Server configurations tasks dialog box, click Next.

Step 3 Create disk partitions.

1. In the Attention group box of the NOS Partitioning dialog box, click Next.
2. In the Preparing startup drive for NOS partitioning group box of the NOS
Partitioning dialog box, click Next.
3. In the Create and format Partition dialog box, configure the size and the file system for
each system partition. In Select the partition size, enter 10240. Select NTFS for the file
system. Then click Next.
4. In the Setting up the NOS partition group box of the NOS Partitioning dialog box, click
Next.
5. In the Server configuration summary dialog box, click Next.
6. In the Server configurations tasks dialog box, click Next.

Step 4 Configure Windows 2000 Server.

1. In the General setup dialog box, configure your name, your company name, your computer
name, your license code, and the password of the administrator. Then click Next.
2. In the General network setup dialog box, configure the group or the domain related to the
IBM x3650 server. Then click Next.
3. In the Network adapter configuration method dialog box, select Use the default settings
for the network adapters.. Then click Next.
4. In the Microsoft licensing mode selection dialog box, click Next.
5. In the Regional settings dialog box, configure the time zone and the language.
6. In the Microsoft component selection dialog box, select Simple Network Management
Protocol. Then click Next.

Step 5 Install Windows 2000 Server.

B-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

1. In the Windows installation dialog box, click Next.

The Windows installation preparation dialog box is displayed. The IBM x3650 server
copies files to the hard disks and prepares to install Windows 2000 Server. This process
takes about one minute.
2. If the message Insert the Windows 2000 server CD is displayed, insert the installation
CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of the IBM x3650 server. Then click Next.
3. In the Microsoft end user license agreement dialog box, select I agree to the terms and
conditions. Then click Next.
In the Copy Windows installation files dialog box, the installation progress is displayed.
This process takes about four minutes.
4. The Remove Windows installation CD dialog box is displayed. Remove the installation
CD-ROM for Windows 2000 Server. Then click Next.
After a restart, the IBM x3650 server starts to install Windows 2000 Server. This process
takes about 30 minutes.
NOTE

During the installation of Windows 2000 Server, if the IBM x3650 server fails to find part of the
installation files, insert the installation CD-ROM for Windows 2000 Server in the CD-ROM drive
and find these files manually.

----End

B.5.3 Install Hotfixes for the OS

Context
This section takes KB823980 as an example. To install KB823980 on a Dell 2950 server, do as
follows:

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to Windows 2000 Server as an administrator.

Step 2 Double-click the Windows2000-KB823980-x86.exe file downloaded from the Web site of
Microsoft. The Software Update Installation Wizard is started. See Figure B-10. Click Next.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-23

Figure B-10 KB823980 Setup Welcome

----End

B.5.4 Configuring Partitions

You can use the disk management tool provided by Windows 2000 Server to create partitions
and set drive letters on a Dell 2950 server according to the partition planning.

B-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Step 3 Create an expanded partition.

1. In Disk 0, right-click Unallocated and choose New Partition. In the Create Partition
Wizard dialog box, click Next.
The Select Partition Type dialog box is displayed.
2. In Select the type of partition you want to create, select Extended partition. Then click
Next.
The Specify Partition Size dialog box is displayed.
3. Use the default value to set the partition size to the maximum free disk space. Then click
Next.
The Completing the Create Partition Wizard dialog box is displayed.
4. Check the settings. Then click Finish.
In Disk 1, Unallocated is changed to Free Space.

Step 4 Create logical drive D.

1. In Disk 1, right-click Free Space and choose New Logical Drive. In the New Partition
Wizard dialog box, click Next.
2. The Select Partition Type dialog box is displayed. By default, in Select the type of
partition you want to create, Logical Drive is selected. Click Next.
The Specify Partition Size dialog box is displayed.
3. In Partition size in MB, enter a value, for example, 219136, to specify the partition size
for drive D. Then click Next.
The Assign Drive Letter or Path dialog box is displayed.

CAUTION
Set partition sizes according to the partition planning. The partition sizes may vary
according to server types. For details on how to set the partition, see B.2.3 Partition
Planning.
For example, the partition size of disk D in the DELL 2950 and IBM x3650 server is 214
GB, equal to 210136 MB;
The partition size of disk D in the IBM x3650T server is 146 GB, equal to 149504 MB.
The partition size of disk D in the HP 380G5 server is 215 GB, equal to 220,160 MB.

Step 5 Repeat Step 4 to create logical drive E. Allocate all the free disk space of disk 0 to drive E.

----End

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-25

B.5.5 Configuring Network Adapters

Before using the network adapters, you need to check their status, rename them, and configure
the IP addresses of the network interfaces.

Figure B-11 Network and Dial-up Connections

2. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, check whether the network adapters
are installed successfully according to the network connection icons. Table B-13 lists the
items for checking whether the network adapters are installed successfully.

Table B-13 Items for checking whether the network adapters are installed successfully
Item Result

Check whether each network connection If a network connection icon is displayed

icon is displayed as . as , you can infer that the

corresponding network adapter is installed
successfully and connected properly.

B-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Item Result

Check whether any network connection If any network connection icon is

icon is displayed as . displayed as , you can infer that the

corresponding network adapter is installed
successfully but connected improperly. In
this case, you need to check cable
connections.

Check whether the network connection If the network connection icon

Step 2 Check the correspondence between the network adapters and their names, and then rename the
network adapters.
NOTE

When installing the drivers for the network adapters, the IBM x3650 server searches for the network
adapters and names them Local Area Connection 0, Local Area Connection 1, Local Area Connection
2, and Local Area Connection 3 in turn. The naming sequence may be inconsistent with the physical
sequence of the network adapters. To correctly identify the network adapters and to prevent improper
operations, before configuring the IP addresses of the network interfaces, you need to check the
correspondence between the network adapters and their names and then rename the network adapters.

The network adapters are installed at the back of the IBM x3650 server. Figure B-12 shows the
connections between the network adapters and other NEs.

Figure B-12 Connections between the network adapters and other NEs
Connecting to a BC
(Network interface 2) (Network interface 3)
Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 1)

(Serial port) Connecting to an
Primary link between the
NMS or an MT
iGWB and a softswitch

1. Remove all the network cables connecting the network adapters of the IBM x3650 server
to other NEs.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-27

In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, all the network connection icons are

displayed as .
2. Insert the network cable that connects to LAN switch 0 in network interface 2. Ensure that
LAN switch 0 is powered on.
In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, a network connection icon is displayed

as .
3. Right-click the network connection icon and choose Rename. Then rename the network
adapter Network adapter1 to 0#LAN Switch.
4. Use the same method to rename the other three network adapters.
NOTE

You are recommended to rename the other three network adapters Network adapter 2 to 1#LAN
Switch, Network adapter 0 to Office LAN, and Network adapter 3 to Billing Center respectively.

Step 3 Configure the IP addresses of the network interfaces.

NOTE

See B.2.1 IP Address Planning to configure the IP addresses of the four network adapters on each IBM
x3650 server. This section takes network interface 1 on the IBM x3650 server functioning as the primary
iGWB server as an example and describes how to configure the IP address to 129.1.1.1.
1. On the desktop of Windows Server 2003, right-click My Network Places and choose
Properties.
2. In the displayed window, right-click Network adapter0 to Office LAN and choose
Properties.
3. Double-click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Select Use the following IP address, and then
set the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway parameters as follows:

IP address 129.1.1.1
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway (Set the default gateway according to actual situations.)

4. Click OK.

----End

B.6 Installing the Director and ServerRAID Manager

This section describes how to install the Director and the ServerRAID Manager, which are used
to monitor the SNMP service and hard disks.
B.6.1 Principle of Monitoring the Hardware
This section describes the principle of monitoring the hardware based on the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
B.6.2 Installing and Configuring the SNMP Service
SNMP-based hardware monitoring is widely used in the field. Before you install the hardware
monitoring software, you need to install and configure the SNMP service.
B.6.3 Installing the Director
The iGWB uses the Director agent software for data management.
B.6.4 Installing the ServeRAID Manager

B-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

The ServeRAID Manager is a type of agent software used for an IBM x3650 server to monitor
its hardware. This section describes how to install the ServeRAID Manager.
B.6.5 Checking the Hardware Monitoring Function
After configuring the SNMP service, and installing the Director and the ServeRAID Manager,
you need to check the hardware monitoring function of the IBM x3650 server.

B.6.1 Principle of Monitoring the Hardware

B.6.2 Installing and Configuring the SNMP Service

SNMP-based hardware monitoring is widely used in the field. Before you install the hardware
monitoring software, you need to install and configure the SNMP service.

Insert the Windows installation CD when the relevant prompt is displayed.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-29

Figure B-13 Windows Components Wizard

B-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure B-14 Management and Monitoring Tools

Step 8 Double-click SNMP Service. The SNMP Service Properties dialog box is displayed. Click the
Traps tab, enter public in Community name, and then click Add to list. See Figure B-15.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-31

Figure B-15 SNMP Service Properties

Figure B-16 SNMP Service Configuration

The configuration information in the Traps bar is displayed, See Figure B-17.

B-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure B-17 SNMP Service Properties

Step 10 Click the Security tab. See Figure B-18. Then click OK.
NOTE

Under Accepted community names, make sure that the name of Community is public and that Rights
of public is READ ONLY.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-33

Figure B-18 SNMP Service Properties

----End

B.6.3 Installing the Director

The iGWB uses the Director agent software for data management.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the Director CD into the CD-ROM drive of the IBM x3650 server.
The IBM Director Setup window is displayed, as shown in Figure B-19.
If the IBM Director Setup window is not displayed, double-click the
dir5.20.2_agent_windows.exe file in \director\agent\window\i386\FILES.

B-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure B-19 IBM Director Setup

Step 2 Click Install IBM Director Agent.

The Extracting Files dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure B-20.

Figure B-20 Extracting Files

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-35

About 10 seconds later, the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for IBM Director Agent
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure B-21.

Figure B-21 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for IBM Director Agent

Step 3 Click Next.

The License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure B-22.

B-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure B-22 License Agreement

Step 4 Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and then click Next.
The Feature and installation directory selection dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
B-23.

Figure B-23 Feature and installation directory selection

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-37

Step 5 Select Level 2: IBM Director Agent and then click Next.
The Security settings dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure B-24.

Figure B-24 Security settings

Step 6 Remove Encrypt data transmission between IBM Director Server and IBM Director
Agent. Select Secure-IBM Director Server must request access to manage this system. See
Figure B-24. Click Next.
The Software Distribution settings dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure B-25.

B-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure B-25 Software Distribution settings

Step 7 Click Next.

The Ready to Install the Program dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure B-26.

Figure B-26 Ready to Install the Program

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-39

Step 8 Click Install.

The installation progress is displayed in the Installing IBM Director Agent dialog box. See
Figure B-27.

Figure B-27 Ready to Install the Program

About one minute later, the Network driver configuration dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure B-28.

B-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure B-28 Network driver configuration

NOTE

It is recommended to use the default settings in Network driver configuration.

Step 9 In the Network driver configuration dialog box, click OK.

The InstallShied Wizard Completed dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure B-29.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-41

Figure B-29 InstallShied Wizard Completed

Step 10 Click Finish.

----End

B.6.4 Installing the ServeRAID Manager

The ServeRAID Manager is a type of agent software used for an IBM x3650 server to monitor
its hardware. This section describes how to install the ServeRAID Manager.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the ServeRAID Manager CD into the CD-ROM drive of the IBM x3650 server.
The ServeRAID Mamager window is displayed, as shown in Figure B-30.

Figure B-30 ServeRAID Mamager

B-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Step 2 Click Install.

The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for ServerRAID Manager dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure B-31.

Figure B-31 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for ServerRAID Manager

Step 3 Click Next.

The License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure B-32.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-43

Figure B-32 License Agreement

Step 4 Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and then click Next.
The Custom Setup dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure B-33.

B-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure B-33 Custom Setup

Step 5 Click Next.

The Ready to Install the Program dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure B-34.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-45

Figure B-34 Ready to Install the Program

Step 6 Click Install.

The installation progress is displayed in the Installing ServeRAID Mamager dialog box. See
Figure B-35.

B-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure B-35 Installing ServeRAID Mamager

About 10 seconds later, the InstallShield Wizard Completed dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure B-36.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-47

Figure B-36 InstallShield Wizard Completed

Step 7 Click Finish.

----End

B.6.5 Checking the Hardware Monitoring Function

After configuring the SNMP service, and installing the Director and the ServeRAID Manager,
you need to check the hardware monitoring function of the IBM x3650 server.

Prerequisite
l The SNMP service is configured and the Director and the ServeRAID Manager are
installed.
l The iGWB Server and the iGWB Client are installed and configured.

Context
Check the hardware monitoring function in one of the following ways:
l Remove a disk from the server. Then check whether the critical alarm iGWB Disk
Failure with the ID of 37 is generated.
l Remove a power module. Then check whether the critical alarm iGWB Power Failure
with the ID of 67 is generated.

B-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

CAUTION
Remove only one disk at a time. If you remove two or more disks, data on the disks may be lost.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the iGWB debugging console. In the Debuginfo main interface, check that the critical
alarm iGWB Power Failure with the ID of 67 and the critical alarm iGWB Disk Failure with
the ID of 37 are not generated.

Step 2 Remove a power module from the IBM x3650 server. In the Debuginfo main interface, check
that the critical alarm iGWB Power Failure with the ID of 67 is generated.
NOTE

Then insert the power module. The alarm with the ID of 67 is cleared.

Step 3 Choose Start > Programs > ServeRAID Manager > ServeRAID Manager.

The ServeRAID Mamager window is displayed, as shown in Figure B-37.

Figure B-37 ServeRAID Mamager

Step 4 Double-click huawei (Local system).

The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure B-38.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-49

Figure B-38 Login

Step 5 Enter proper information in User name and Password, and then click Connect.

The Controller 1 RAID Controller IBM ServeRAID 8k icon is displayed in huawei (Local
system) on the right of the ServeRAID Mamager window. See Figure B-39.

Figure B-39 huawei (Local system)

About 15 seconds later, the information about Controller 1 (IBM ServeRAID 8k) is displayed
in the right area of ServeRAID Mamager. See Figure B-40.

B-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure B-40 huawei (Local system)

Step 6 Right-click the fourth disk icon in dark blue.

The shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure B-41.

Figure B-41 Shortcut menu

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-51

Step 7 Choose Set drive state to defunct.

The fourth disk icon turns gray. See Figure B-42.

Figure B-42 Window after the disk icon turns gray

Step 8 In the Debuginfo main interface of the iGWB debugging console, check that the critical alarm
with the ID of 37 is generated.
Step 9 Restart the IBM x3650 server.
After the IBM x3650 server is restarted, the disk recovers automatically.
Step 10 Log in to the iGWB debugging console again. In the Debuginfo main interface, check that the
critical alarm with the ID of 37 is cleared.
NOTE

It takes a certain time to restore the data on the disk after the alarm iGWB Disk Failure is cleared.

----End

B-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

C Installing an OS on an IBM x3650T Server

This appendix describes the hardware of an IBM x3650T server and the procedure for installing
an OS on an IBM x3650T server.
C.1 Installation Process
This section describes the process of installing the OS on an IBM x3650T server.
C.2 Installation Planning
This section describes the installation planning such as IP address planning, user planning, and
partition planning. After reading this section, you can easily and quickly install the OS and
configure it to meet the requirements of the iGWB.
C.3 Installation Prerequisites
This section describes the installation prerequisites such as checking the software and hardware
of an IBM x3650T server.
C.4 Hardware Installation
This section describes the hardware of an IBM x3650T server and the cable connections of the
iGWB. Before connecting the cables, you need to complete the installation of a cabinet and the
components in the cabinet.
C.5 Installing and Configuring Windows 2000 Server
This section describes how to install and configure Windows 2000 Server on an IBM x3650T
server.
C.6 Installing the SCSI SNMP and ISM
This section describes how to install the SCSI SNMP and the Intel System Manager (ISM),
which are used to monitor hard disks and power supplies.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-1

C.1 Installation Process

This section describes the process of installing the OS on an IBM x3650T server.
Figure C-1 shows the process of installing an IBM x3650T server.

Figure C-1 Process of installing an IBM x3650T server

1. Hardware Start
installation

Install a cabinet and its

internal components

Connect cables

2. OS installation Configure hard disks as

and configuration RAID 1

Install Windows Server

2000

Enable Windows 2000

Server to support Chinese

Install hotfixes for Windows

2000 Server

Install motherboard drivers

Insatll backplane drivers

Install network adapter

drivers

Configure partitions

Configure the IP addresses

of network interfaces

End

C-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

NOTE

For details about how to install a cabinet and its internal components, see the Hardware Installation for
the SOFTX3000.

C.2 Installation Planning

This section describes the installation planning such as IP address planning, user planning, and
partition planning. After reading this section, you can easily and quickly install the OS and
configure it to meet the requirements of the iGWB.
C.2.1 IP Address Planning
Before installing the iGWB, you need to plan IP addresses according to the requirements of the
office. This section describes the principles of configuring IP addresses and related precautions.
This section also provides suggested IP addresses.
C.2.2 User Planning
The iGWB involves multiple types of users, such as the OS user on an iGWB server, the OS
user on an MT, the FTP user on a BS, the administrator of the iGWB, and the normal user of
the iGWB. Before installing the iGWB, you need to plan users.
C.2.3 Partition Planning
This section describes the planning for the partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server.

C.2.1 IP Address Planning

If any network adapter name is inconsistent with that listed in Table C-1, reconfigure the network adapter
name. For details, see A.5.6 Configuring Network Adapters in A Installing an OS on a Dell 2950
Server, B.5.5 Configuring Network Adapters in B Installing an OS on an IBM x3650 Server, C.5.8
Configuring Network Adapters in C Installing an OS on an IBM x3650T Server, orD.5.7 Configuring
Network Adapters in D Installing HP ProLiant DL380 G5 Server.

Table C-1 Planned IP addresses

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP
Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Primary iGWB Network This network 129.9.1.2/ 129.9.1.1

server iGWB0 adapter 0 to adapter 255.255.255.0
office LAN connects
iGWB0 to an
MT and
functions as an
NMS interface.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-3

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Network This network 130.1.3.1/ 172.30.200.1

Network This network Configure the Do not

adapter 3 to BC adapter fixed IP address configure the
connects or the subnet virtual IP
iGWB0 to a BC mask according address.
and functions as to actual
a charging situations.
interface.

C-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Secondary Network This network 129.9.1.3/ 129.9.1.1

iGWB server adapter 0 to adapter 255.255.255.0
iGWB1 office LAN connects
iGWB1 to an
MT and
functions as an
NMS interface.

Network This network 130.1.3.2/ 172.30.200.1

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-5

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Network This network Configure the Do not

adapter 3 to BC adapter fixed IP address configure the
connects or the subnet virtual IP
iGWB1 to a BC mask according address.
and functions as to actual
a charging situations.
interface.

NOTE

C.2.2 User Planning

See Table C-2 and plan OS users. See Table C-3 and plan iGWB users.

Table C-2 Planned OS users

User Role Description User Name Password

Administrator An administrator has administrator The default password

all the permissions. is igwb.

FTP user A BS accesses the BS is recommended. BS is recommended.

C-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

User Role Description User Name Password

The iGWB transfers The user name is

CDR files to a BS as configured by the
an FTP user. This BS.
user is created by the
BS. The BS needs to
notify the iGWB of
the user name.

An iGWB server You need to

The iGWB backs up The user name is

Table C-3 Planned iGWB users

User Role Description User Name Password

iGWB administrator An administrator of l admin The password is left

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-7

C.2.3 Partition Planning

This section describes the planning for the partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server.
The iGWB uses RAID to configure the hard disks of an iGWB server as RAID 1. According to
the requirements of the iGWB Server, you need to divide the hard disks on an IBM x3650T
server into three partitions. You also need to use the NTFS. You are recommended to set the
drive letters for the three partitions to C, D, and E respectively. You are also recommended to
set the drive letter for the flash memory to F and that for the CD-ROM driver to G.
Table C-4 lists the planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server.

Table C-4 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an IBM x3650T server
Partition Size Description

C 8 GB This partition is used to install the OS and the

iGWB Server.

D 146 GB This partition is used to store original CDR

files, log files, and status files.

E 146 GB This partition is used to store final CDR files,

backup files, and status files.

F 64 MB As the flash memory provided by the IBM

x3650T server, this partition is used to back
up the major files such as igwb.ini.

G - This partition is used as a CD-ROM drive.

C.3 Installation Prerequisites

This section describes the installation prerequisites such as checking the software and hardware
of an IBM x3650T server.
C.3.1 Checking Hardware
Before installing the OS, you need to check the hardware of each IBM x3650T server. This
section describes the hardware of each IBM x3650T server.
C.3.2 Checking Software
Before installing the OS, you need to check the software of each IBM x3650T server.

C.3.1 Checking Hardware

Before installing the OS, you need to check the hardware of each IBM x3650T server. This
section describes the hardware of each IBM x3650T server.

C-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Context
NOTE

l Because servers are upgraded frequently, the hardware of IBM x3650T servers may vary according to
actual situations. In this case, refer to the packing list.
l The iGWB uses two IBM x3650T servers configured with the same hardware. One functions as the
primary iGWB server. The other functions as the secondary iGWB server.

Procedure
Table C-5 lists the hardware of each IBM x3650T server.

Table C-5 Hardware of each IBM x3650T server

Item Configuration

CPU Two Xeon 3.2 GHz or faster CPUs

Hard disk Two 300 GB hard disks configured as RAID 1

Memory One 1 GB memory board

Network adapter Two integrated 1000 Mbps network adapters

Two 1000 Mbps PCI network adapters

----End

C.3.2 Checking Software

Before installing the OS, you need to check the software of each IBM x3650T server.

Context
NOTE

l Because servers are upgraded frequently, the software of IBM x3650T servers may vary according to
actual situations. In this case, refer to the packing list.
l iGWBThe iGWB uses two IBM x3650T servers configured with the same software. One functions as
the primary iGWB server. The other functions as the secondary iGWB server.

Procedure
Table C-6 lists the software of each IBM x3650T server.

Table C-6 Software of each IBM x3650T server

Item Description

System x3650T Documentation and Resource This CD-ROM is used to install the drivers
CD Version 3.0 for an IBM x3650T server.

x3650T Added Driver and Utility CD This CD-ROM is used to install the
management software for an IBM x3650T
server.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-9

Item Description

IBM System IBM Director Version 5.10 This CD-ROM is used to install the IBM
Update 2 for Intel and AMD-based Hardware Director.

IBM Pro/1000 GT Server Adapters by Intel This CD-ROM is used to install the driver
Software Installation CD Version 10.2 for the expanded network adapter of an IBM
x3650T server.

Installation Assistance CD This CD-ROM is used to install the OS for

an IBM x3650T server.

----End

C.4 Hardware Installation

This section describes the hardware of an IBM x3650T server and the cable connections of the
iGWB. Before connecting the cables, you need to complete the installation of a cabinet and the
components in the cabinet.
C.4.1 Structural Views of an IBM x3650T Server
This section describes the structural views of an IBM x3650T server.
C.4.2 Connecting Cables
This section describes how to connect the cables such as power cables, network cables, and C2T
cables of the iGWB. Before connecting the cables, you need to complete the installation of the
cabinet and the components inside the cabinet.

C.4.1 Structural Views of an IBM x3650T Server

This section describes the structural views of an IBM x3650T server.

Front View
Figure C-2 shows the front view of an IBM x3650T server with a plate.

Figure C-2 Front view of an IBM x3650T server with a plate

A B C

E D

A: guide rail for a peripheral B: switches and status indicators on the front panel

C-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

C: serial port 2 (RJ45) and USB port D: disk frame 1

E: disk frame 2 -

Figure C-3 shows the front view of an IBM x3650T server without a plate.

Figure C-3 Front view of an IBM x3650T server without a plate

A B C

G F E D

A: guide rail for a peripheral B: switches and status indicators on the front panel

C: serial port 2 (RJ45) and USB port D: control bar for the connector in SCSI disk frame 1

E: disk frame 1 D: control bar for the connector in SCSI disk frame 2

E: disk frame 2 -

Figure C-4 shows the switches and the indicators on the front panel of an IBM x3650T server.
Table C-7 lists the switches and the indicators on the front panel of an IBM x3650T server.

Figure C-4 Switches and indicators on the front panel of an IBM x3650T server
A B C D E F

M L K J I H G

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-11

Table C-7 Switches and indicators on the front panel of an IBM x3650T server
Item Name Description

A Power switch This switch is used to control the power supply.

B Reset switch This switch is used to reset the IBM x3650T server.

L ID switch This switch is used to control the server ID indicator.

M NMI switch This switch is used to control whether to insert the

NMI to the backplane.

C Indicator for a critical If this indicator is on in yellow, you can infer that a
alarm critical fault occurs on the IBM x3650T server. For
example, a great amount of memory data is lost.
In this case, the IBM x3650T server fails and starts a
relay for a critical alarm.

D Indicator for a major If this indicator is on in yellow, you can infer that a
alarm major fault occurs on the IBM x3650T server. For
example, one or two mirrored disks are lost.
A major fault impacts on the IBM x3650T server to
a great extent. If a major fault occurs, the IBM
x3650T server continues running. The features,
except the key ones, and the performance of the IBM
x3650T server are affected. In this case, the IBM
x3650T server starts a relay for a major alarm.

E Indicator for a minor If this indicator is on in yellow, you can infer that a
alarm minor fault occurs on the IBM x3650T server. For
example, a recoverable ECC error occurs.
A minor fault impacts on the running of the IBM
x3650T server to a small extent. If a minor fault
occurs, the IBM x3650T server starts a relay for a
minor alarm.

F Indicator for a power If this indicator is on in yellow, you can infer that a
alarm power failure occurs on the IBM x3650T server.
In this case, the IBM x3650T server starts a relay for
a power alarm.

G Indicator 1 for the If SCSI disk 1 runs normally, this indicator is on in

disk status green.
If SCSI disk 1 is faulty, this indicator is on in yellow.

H Indicator 2 for the If SCSI disk 2 runs normally, this indicator is on in

disk status green.
If SCSI disk 2 is faulty, this indicator is on in yellow.

C-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Item Name Description

I Indicator for the If this indicator is on in green, you can infer that the
status of the primary DC power supply of the IBM x3650T server is
power supply normal.
If this indicator is off, you can infer that a fault occurs
on the primary power supply.

J Indicator for the This indicator indicates the status of network adapter
status of network 0 or network adapter 1. When being on, it is in green.
adapter 0 or network
adapter 1

K Server ID indicator This indicator indicates the status of an SCSI disk on

the IBM x3650T server. When being on, it is in white.

Back View
Figure C-5 shows the back view of an IBM x3650T server.

Figure C-5 Back view of an IBM x3650T server

A B C D E F

Q P O N M L K J I H G

A: DB-15 alarm interface B: unconfigured PCI expansion slot

B: configured PCI expansion slot D: connection point for a protection ground

E: secondary DC-input power supply F: primary DC-input power supply

G: primary power module H: secondary power module

I: SCSI U320 J: server management interface

K: USB port 0 L: USB port 1

M: monitor interface N: RJ45 network interface 2

O: RJ45 network interface 1 P: serial port 2 (RJ45)

Q: PS/2 interface used to connect to a keyboard or a mouse -

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-13

C.4.2 Connecting Cables

This section describes how to connect the cables such as power cables, network cables, and C2T
cables of the iGWB. Before connecting the cables, you need to complete the installation of the
cabinet and the components inside the cabinet.
When connecting a peripheral to an IBM x3650T server, you need to adhere to the following
principles:
l For most peripherals, you need to connect them to dedicated connectors and install related
drivers on the IBM x3650T server. Typically, the drivers are provided with the OS software
or the peripherals. For details about installing and configuring a peripheral, see the
description file provided with the peripheral.
l When connecting the peripheral to the IBM x3650T server, ensure that the peripheral and
the IBM x3650T server are powered off. Unless otherwise noted in the description file
provided with the peripheral, after connection, power on the peripheral before powering
on the IBM x3650T server.

Connecting Power Cables

The input power for an IBM x3650T server is -48 V DC. The IBM x3650T server uses two
power supplies for redundancy purposes. Only one power supply is sufficient for the IBM
x3650T server to run normally.

CAUTION
When connecting power cables, connect the positive pole of the power terminal of the IBM
x3650T server to the grounding terminal of the -48 V DC power supply. Connect the negative
pole of the power terminal of the IBM x3650T server to the -48 V terminal of the -48 V DC
power supply.

Connecting Network Cables

Figure C-6 shows the four network interfaces at the back of an IBM x3650T server. For
description purposes, these network interfaces are numbered from zero to three. See Table
C-8. When connecting network cables, ensure that you connect the network cables to the network
interfaces correctly.

C-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure C-6 Network interfaces at the back of an IBM x3650T server

Connecting to LAN switch 0

Connecting to a BC

Connecting to an NMS or an MT Connecting to LAN switch 1

Table C-8 Numbered network interfaces of an IBM x3650T server

Network Interface No. Description

Network interface on the 0 This network interface connects to an NMS or

left of the integrated an MT.
network adapter

Network interface on the 1 This network interface connects to LAN switch

right of the integrated 0. The iGWB communicates with the primary
network adapter plane of a softswitch through this network
interface.

Network interface below 2 This network interface connects to LAN switch

the PCI network adapter 1. The iGWB communicates with the secondary
plane of a softswitch through this network
interface. This network interface is also used to
form the first heartbeat link between the two
IBM x3650T servers.

Network interface above 3 This network interface connects to a billing

the PCI network adapter center and functions as a charging interface.

NOTE

Number the network interfaces in turn from the left to the right and from the bottom to the top.

Connecting Serial Cables

Use a serial cable to connect the serial ports of the two IBM x3650T serves. This connection
forms the second heartbeat link between the two IBM x3650T servers. Figure C-7 shows the
connection between the serial ports of the two IBM x3650T servers.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-15

Figure C-7 Connection between the serial ports of the two IBM x3650T servers
iGWB1

iGWB0

NOTE

IBM x3650T servers use RJ45 serial ports. Therefore, use an RJ-45->DB9 adapter to connect the serial
ports of the two IBM x3650T servers.

Connecting C2T Cables

A C2T cable is used to connect an IBM x3650T server to a display, keyboard, and mouse. A
C2T cable consists of a display cable, a keyboard cable, and a mouse cable. These cables are
provided with the iGWB.
To save space, the two IBM x3650T servers and the BAM server share a set of KVM switch.
Connect one end of a C2T cable to the KVM switch. Connect the other end to the interfaces of
the display, keyboard, and mouse of an IBM x3650T server. Ensure that the KVM switch is
connected to iGWB0 through the PC2 interface and to iGWB1 through the PC3 interface. Figure
C-8 shows the connections of the C2T cables.

NOTE

The mouse and the keyboard share one USB interface.

C-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure C-8 Connections of the C2T cables

KVM switch

PC 4 PC 3 PC 2 PC 1
Connecting to a BAM server
iGWB1

iGWB0

Video cable
Mouse or keyboard cable

C.5 Installing and Configuring Windows 2000 Server

This section describes how to install and configure Windows 2000 Server on an IBM x3650T
server.

Context
NOTE

The procedures for installing and configuring the OS on the two IBM x3650T servers are the same. This
section takes the IBM x3650T server functioning as the primary iGWB server as an example and describes
how to install and configure the OS on the IBM x3650T server.

C.5.1 Configuring Hard Disks as RAID 1

This section describes how to configure the hard disks of an IBM x3650T server as RAID 1.
C.5.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server
This section describes how to install Windows 2000 Server on an IBM x3650T server.
C.5.3 Install Hotfixes for the OS

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-17

For security purposes, you need to install the hotfixes for the OS, released by Microsoft, on each
Dell 2950 server. This section describes how to install the hotfixes for the OS on each Dell 2950
server.
C.5.4 Installing Motherboard Drivers
This section describes how to install motherboard drivers on an IBM x3650T server.
C.5.5 Installing Backplane Drivers
This section describes how to install backplane drivers on an IBM x3650T server.
C.5.6 Installing Network Adapter Drivers
Each Dell 2950 server is configured with four network adapters. You need to install drivers for
the network adapters.
C.5.7 Configuring Partitions
You can use the disk management tool provided by Windows 2000 Server to create partitions
and set drive letters on a Dell 2950 server according to the partition planning.
C.5.8 Configuring Network Adapters
Before using the network adapters, you need to check their status, rename them, and configure
the IP addresses of the network interfaces.

C.5.1 Configuring Hard Disks as RAID 1

This section describes how to configure the hard disks of an IBM x3650T server as RAID 1.

Context
An IBM x3650T server is configured with two built-in 300 GB hard disks. To ensure stable
running, the iGWB uses the RAID-1 error tolerance technology.

CAUTION
l Configuring the hard disks of an IBM x3650T server as RAID 1 causes losses of all the data
on the hard disks. Therefore, perform this operation with caution.
l The hard disks of each IBM x3650T server are configured as RAID 1 before the iGWB is
delivered. Typically, you do not need to reconfigure the hard disks as RAID 1. You only
need to check the RAID configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the hard disks are configured as RAID 1.
1. Power on the IBM x3650T sever. When the following information is displayed, press
ESC to view diagnostic messages:
Press <ESC> to view diagnostic messages

2. When the following information is displayed, press Ctrl+C:

Press Ctrl-C to start LSI Logic Configuration Utility

l If the IBM x3650T server is configured with logical drives and the hard disks are
configured as RAID 1, in the LSI Logic Host Bus Adapters interface, the RAID status
is Optimal. See Figure C-9.

C-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

l If the IBM x3650T server is configured with logical drives, the hard disks are configured
as RAID 1, and the hard disks are being synchronized, in the LSI Logic Host Bus
Adapters interface, the RAID status is Resycing.
l If the IBM x3650T server is not configured with logical drives and the hard disks are
not configured as RAID 1, or if the IBM x3650T server is not running normally, in the
LSI Logic Host Bus Adapters interface, the RAID status is neither Optimal nor
Resycing. In this case, perform the next step.

Figure C-9 LSI Logic Host Bus Adapters

LSI Logic Host Bus Adapters

Adapter PCI Dev/ Port IRQ NUM Boot LSI Logic RAID
Bus Func Number Order Control Status

<1020 / 1030 2 29> CC00 11 Yes 0 Enabled --

<1020 / 1030 2 28> C800 7 Yes 1 Enabled Optimal

Step 2 Configure the hard disks as RAID 1.

1. In the LSI Logic Host Bus Adapters interface, use arrow keys to select 1020/1030 2 28,
and then press Enter.
The Adapter Properties interface is displayed. See Figure C-10.

Figure C-10 Adapter Properties

Adapter Properties

Adapter PCI Dev/

Bus Func
1020/1030 2 28

<RAID Properties> <Synchronize Whole Mirror>

Host SCSI ID [7]

SCSI Bus Scan Order [ Low to High (0..Max) ]

Removable Media Support [ None]

2. Use arrow keys to select <RAID Properties>, and then press Enter.
The RAID Properties interface is displayed. See Figure C-11.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-19

Figure C-11 RAID Properties

SCSI Device Identifier Array Hot Status Predict

ID Disk? Spare Failure
0 IBM - ESXSST3300007LC [ No ] [ No ] ------ ---

1 IBM - ESXSST3300007LC [ No ] [ No ] ------ ---

3. Use arrow keys to select the row where the SCSI ID is 0, and then use arrow keys to select
No in column Array Disk?. Press + to change No to Yes. Then press F3 to save the settings.
NOTE

If any data is stored on the hard disks, when you press F3 to save the settings, the following
information is displayed:
WARNING: Data on drive will be Lost!
Press DELETE if data loss OK or any other key to cancel
If you are sure to delete the data from the hard disks, press Delete.
4. Use arrow keys to select the row where the SCSI ID is 1, and then use arrow keys to select
No in column Array Disk?. Press + to change No to Yes. Then press F3 to save the settings.
Press Esc to exit the RAID Properties interface. The RAID Properties Changed interface
is displayed.
5. Use arrow keys to select <Save changes then exit this menu>. Then press Enter and
Esc.

Figure C-12 RAID Properties Changed

RAID Properties Changed

Exit the Configuration Utility

<Save changes then exit this menu>

<Discard changes then exit this menu>

6. In the RAID Properties Changed interface, use arrow keys to select <Exit the
Configuration Utility>. Then press Enter.
The IBM x3650T server restarts.

C-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure C-13 <Exit the Configuration Utility>

Are you sure you want to exit?

<Exit the Configuration Utility>

Save changes then exit this menu

Discard changes then exit this menu

NOTE

l When the hard disks are being synchronized, the hard disk indicator on the front panel of the IBM
x3650T server blinks in green and orange. When the hard disks are synchronized, the indicator is on
in green.
l Synchronizing two 300 GB hard disks takes more than eight hours.
l Synchronizing hard disks does not affect the software installation progress of an IBM x3650T server.

----End

C.5.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server

This section describes how to install Windows 2000 Server on an IBM x3650T server.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IBM x3650T server to start from the CD-ROM drive.
1. Power on the IBM x3650T server. After a self check, the startup interface is displayed.
Press F2 to start the BIOS Setup Utility.
2. In the BIOS SETUP UTILITY interface, use arrow keys to select Boot.
3. In the Boot menu, set the Boot Device Priority parameter by setting the 1st Boot Device
parameter to PM-SONY CD-RM/DVD. Then press F10 to save the settings and exit.

Step 2 Use the Installation Assistance CD to start the IBM x3650T server.
1. Insert the Installation Assistance CD in the CD-ROM drive of the IBM x3650T server.
2. The IBM x3650T server restarts. If the message "Press any key to boot from CD" is
displayed, press any key to start the IBM x3650T server from the CD-ROM drive.

Step 3 After copying initialization files is complete, the setup wizard is started and the welcome
interface is displayed. Press Enter to install Windows 2000 Server.

Step 4 The license agreement is displayed. Read the license agreement carefully. Press F8 to accept
the license agreement or press ESC to quit installing Windows 2000 Server.

Step 5 Create partitions and continue to copy installation files of Windows 2000 Server.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-21

NOTE

When creating partitions, do not select the 64 MB flash memory for the installation drive of Windows 2000
Server.
1. The IBM x3650T server searches for the partitions of the hard disks and displays related
information. Use arrow keys to select the following information, and press C to create a
partition (drive C):
This partition is used to install Windows 2000 Server.
xxxxxx MB Disk 0 at Id0 on bus 0 on Symmpi
Unpartitioned space xxxxxxMB

2. You are prompted to enter a capacity value for drive C. Enter 8GB, and then press
Enter.
3. The capacity information about drive C is displayed. Press Enter.
4. You are prompted to select a file system for drive C. Select NTFS, and then press Enter.
5. After formatting drive C is complete, the IBM x3650T server continues to copy installation
files of Windows 2000 Server. The copying progress is displayed.
Step 6 The IBM x3650T server runs the installation files and configures its hardware.
1. After copying installation files is complete, the IBM x3650T server restarts.
2. After restart, the IBM x3650T server runs the installation files and configures its hardware.
This process takes about 10 minutes.
After the hardware is configured, the Regional and language option dialog box is
displayed.
Step 7 You are prompted to configure the information about your country or area, your language, and
your keyboard layout. Use the default settings, and then click Next.
The Personalize Your Software dialog box is displayed.
Step 8 In Name, enter Huawei. In Organization, enter huawei. Then click Next.
The Your Product Key dialog box is displayed.
NOTE

The user name Huawei and the organization name huawei are for your reference only. Set these parameters
according to actual situations.

Step 9 In Product Key, enter the serial number of the product. Then click Next.
The License Modes dialog box is displayed.
NOTE

For the serial number of the product, see the surface of the Installation Assistance CD or the description
documents provided with the iGWB.

Step 10 Select Per server. Set the number of licensed users according to that specified in the license
agreement. For example, set the number of licensed users to 60. Then click Next.
Step 11 After the hardware are checked, the Computer Name and Administrator Password dialog
box is displayed. Enter the server name and the administrator password. Then click Next.
The Date and Time Settings dialog box is displayed.

C-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

NOTE

The server name and the administrator password are set as follows before the iGWB is delivered:
l Server name: One IBM x3650T server is named iGWB0. The other IBM x3650T server is named
iGWB1.
l Administrator password: igwb

Step 12 Set the current date and time. Set the time zone according to the country or area of the carrier.
Then click Next.

Step 13 The IBM x3650 server continues to install Windows 2000 Server, for example, configure the
network, install program components, install Start menus, register program components, save
settings, and delete temporary files. This process takes about 24 minutes.
Step 14 After installation, the IBM x3650T server restarts.

----End

C.5.3 Install Hotfixes for the OS

Context
This section takes KB823980 as an example. To install KB823980 on a Dell 2950 server, do as
follows:

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to Windows 2000 Server as an administrator.
Step 2 Double-click the Windows2000-KB823980-x86.exe file downloaded from the Web site of
Microsoft. The Software Update Installation Wizard is started. See Figure C-14. Click Next.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-23

Figure C-14 KB823980 Setup Welcome

Step 4 Click Finish.

----End

C.5.4 Installing Motherboard Drivers

This section describes how to install motherboard drivers on an IBM x3650T server.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the System x3650T Documentation and Resource CD Version 3.0 in the CDR-ROM
drive of the IBM x3650T server.

Step 2 In \software\Drivers\Chipset_INF\Intel_E7520_Chipset_Drivers\, double-click the

EI_6.3.1.1004.exe file to install the motherboard drivers.
NOTE

Use the default values of all the parameters and proceed as prompted.

After installation, you are prompted to restart the IBM x3650T server.

Step 3 Click No and continue to install other drivers.

----End

C.5.5 Installing Backplane Drivers

This section describes how to install backplane drivers on an IBM x3650T server.

C-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Procedure
Step 1 Start the Device Manager.
1. On the desktop of Windows 2000 Server, right-click My Computer and choose
Properties.
The System Properties dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Hardware tab, and then click Device Manager.
The Device Manager dialog box is displayed. The hardware for which drivers need to be
installed are listed.

Step 2 Update the backplane drivers.

1. In the Device Manager dialog box, double-click ESG-TSD SCA HSBP M23 SCSI
Processor Device.
2. In the displayed dialog box, click the Driver tab, and then click Update Driver.
The Welcome to the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box is displayed.
3. Select No, not this time, and then click Next.
4. In the displayed dialog box, select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced),
and then click Next.
The Please choose your search and installation options dialog box is displayed.
5. In Search for the best driver in these locations, select Include this location in the
search:. Click Browse. Select CD-ROM drive letter\Drivers\HSBP. Then click Next.
The IBM x3650T server searches for the backplane drivers in CD-ROM drive letter\Drivers
\HSBP. Then it copies and installs the drivers.
6. Click Next.
After the installation is complete, the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box is displayed.
7. Click Finish. The ESD-TSD SCA HSBP M23 SCSI Processor Properties dialog box is
displayed. Click Close.
The backplane drivers are updated. The installation of the backplane drivers is complete.

Step 3 Update the SCSI drivers.

1. In the Device Manager dialog box, click SCSI and RAID controllers.
In SCSI and RAID controllers, two SCSI connectors are displayed.
2. Double-click either SCSI/RAID Host Controller.
The Welcome to the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box is displayed.
3. Select No, not this time, and then click Next.
4. In the displayed dialog box, select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced),
and then click Next.
5. Click Browse. Select CD-ROM drive letter\Drivers\HSBP. Then click Next.
The IBM x3650T server searches for the information about the SCSI connector. In the
displayed dialog box, select the software that matches the SCSI connector best. Ensure that
the software is in CD-ROM drive letter.
6. Click Next. See Figure C-15.
The IBM x3650T server installs the driver for the SCSI connector. After the installation is
complete, the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-25

Figure C-15 Selecting the software that matches the SCSI connector best

7. Click Finish. Then in the displayed dialog box, click Close.

The SCSI driver is updated. In this case, the following information is displayed:
LSI Adapter Ultra320 SCSI 2000 Series (1020/1030)

8. You are prompted to determine whether to restart the IBM x3650T server. Click NO.
9. Repeat Step 3.1 through Step 3.8 to update the driver for the other SCSI connector.
10. Restart the IBM x3650T server to install the drivers for network adapters.
The installation of the SCSI drivers is complete.

----End

C.5.6 Installing Network Adapter Drivers

Each Dell 2950 server is configured with four network adapters. You need to install drivers for
the network adapters.

Procedure
Step 1 On the desktop of Windows 2000 Server, right-click My Computer and choose Properties.
Step 2 In the System Properties dialog box, click the Hardware tab. See Figure C-16.

C-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure C-16 System Properties

Step 3 Click Device Manager. The Device Manager dialog box is displayed.
In Other devices, the detected Ethernet network adapters and RAID cards that cannot work
properly are displayed.

Step 4 Double-click a network adapter. In the Ethernet Controller Properties dialog box, click the
Driver tab. Then click Update Driver….
The Welcome to the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Select No, not this time, and then click Next.

Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced), and then
click Next.
The Please choose your search and installation options dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 In Search for the best driver in these locations, select Include this location in the search:.
Click Browse. Select the path with the CD-ROM drive letter for the path of the driver file. Then
click Next.
The Dell 2950 server searches for the driver for the network adapter in the specified path. Then
it copies and installs the driver.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-27

Step 8 Click Next. After the installation is complete, the Hardware Update Wizard dialog box is
displayed.

Step 9 Click Finish. The Properties dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The network adapter driver
is updated.
The driver for the first network adapter is installed.

Step 10 Follow the previous steps to install the drivers for the other network adapters and the RAID
cards.

----End

C.5.7 Configuring Partitions

You can use the disk management tool provided by Windows 2000 Server to create partitions
and set drive letters on a Dell 2950 server according to the partition planning.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management. The Computer
Management window is displayed.

Step 2 Change the drive letter for the CD-ROM drive.

1. In the navigation tree of the Computer Management window, choose Storage > Disk
Management.
The information about the current partitions on the Dell 2950 server is displayed in the
right pane of the Computer Management window.
2. Right-click the drive letter for the CD-ROM drive and choose Change Drive Letter and
Path.
3. In the Change Drive Letter and Paths for (D:) dialog box, click Change…. In the Change
Drive Letter or Path dialog box, select F from the drop-down list box on the right. Then
click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
4. Click Yes. The drive letter is changed to F.

Step 3 Create an expanded partition.

Step 4 Create logical drive D.

C-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

----End

C.5.8 Configuring Network Adapters

Before using the network adapters, you need to check their status, rename them, and configure
the IP addresses of the network interfaces.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-29

Figure C-17 Network and Dial-up Connections

2. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, check whether the network adapters
are installed successfully according to the network connection icons. Table C-9 lists the
items for checking whether the network adapters are installed successfully.

Table C-9 Items for checking whether the network adapters are installed successfully

Item Result

Check whether each network connection If a network connection icon is displayed

icon is displayed as . as , you can infer that the

corresponding network adapter is installed
successfully and connected properly.

Check whether any network connection If any network connection icon is

icon is displayed as . displayed as , you can infer that the

corresponding network adapter is installed
successfully but connected improperly. In
this case, you need to check cable
connections.

Check whether the network connection If the network connection icon

Step 2 Check the correspondence between the network adapters and their names, and then rename the
network adapters.

C-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

NOTE

When installing the drivers for the network adapters, the IBM x3650T server searches for the network
adapters and names them Local Area Connection 0, Local Area Connection 1, Local Area Connection
2, and Local Area Connection 3 in turn. The naming sequence may be inconsistent with the physical
sequence of the network adapters. To correctly identify the network adapters and to prevent improper
operations, before configuring the IP addresses of the network interfaces, you need to check the
correspondence between the network adapters and their names and then rename the network adapters.

The network adapters are installed at the back of the IBM x3650T server. Figure C-18 shows
the connections between the network adapters and other NEs.

Figure C-18 Connections between the network adapters and other NEs

Primary link between the iGWB and a softswitch

Connecting to a BC
(Network interface 1) (Network interface 3)

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 2)

Connecting to an NMS or an MT Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch

1. Remove all the network cables connecting the network adapters of the IBM x3650T server
to other NEs.
In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, all the network connection icons are

as .
3. Right-click the network connection icon and choose Rename. Then rename the network
adapter Network adapter1 to 0#LAN Switch.
4. Use the same method to rename the other three network adapters.
NOTE

You are recommended to rename the other three network adapters Network adapter 2 to 1#LAN
Switch, Network adapter 0 to Office LAN, and Network adapter 3 to Billing Center respectively.

Step 3 Configure the IP addresses of the network interfaces.

NOTE

See C.2.1 IP Address Planning to configure the IP addresses of the four network interfaces on each IBM
x3650T server. This section takes network interface 1 on the IBM x3650T server functioning as the primary
iGWB server as an example and describes how to configure the IP address to 129.1.1.1.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-31

1. On the desktop of Windows Server 2003, right-click My Network Places and choose
Properties.
2. In the displayed window, right-click Network adapter 0 to Office LAN and choose
Properties.
3. Double-click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Select Use the following IP address, and then
set the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway parameters as follows:

IP address 129.1.1.1
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway (Set the default gateway according to actual situations.)

4. Click OK.
----End

C.6 Installing the SCSI SNMP and ISM

This section describes how to install the SCSI SNMP and the Intel System Manager (ISM),
which are used to monitor hard disks and power supplies.
C.6.1 Principle of Monitoring the Hardware
This section describes the principle of monitoring the hardware based on the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
C.6.2 Installing and Configuring the SNMP Service
SNMP-based hardware monitoring is widely used in the field. Before you install the hardware
monitoring software, you need to install and configure the SNMP service.
C.6.3 Installing the SCSI SNMP
The iGWB uses the SCSI SNMP agent software to monitor disk arrays. This section describes
how to install the SCSI SNMP.
C.6.4 Installing the ISM
The ISM is a type of agent software used for an IBM x3650T server to monitor its hardware.
This section describes how to install the ISM.
C.6.5 Checking the Hardware Monitoring Function
After configuring the SNMP service, and installing the SCSI SNMP and the ISM, you need to
check the hardware monitoring function of the IBM x3650T server.

C.6.1 Principle of Monitoring the Hardware

C-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Monitoring the hardware only requires installing and configuring SNMP, TCP/IP, and the agent
software provided by the server supplier.

C.6.2 Installing and Configuring the SNMP Service

SNMP-based hardware monitoring is widely used in the field. Before you install the hardware
monitoring software, you need to install and configure the SNMP service.

Insert the Windows installation CD when the relevant prompt is displayed.

Figure C-19 Windows Components Wizard

Step 4 In the Components drop-down list box of Windows Components Wizard, choose
Management and Monitoring Tools, click Details... .

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-33

The Management and Monitoring Tools dialog box is displayed. See Figure C-20.

Figure C-20 Management and Monitoring Tools

Step 8 Double-click SNMP Service. The SNMP Service Properties dialog box is displayed. Click the
Traps tab, enter public in Community name, and then click Add to list. See Figure C-21.

C-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure C-21 SNMP Service Properties

Figure C-22 SNMP Service Configuration

The configuration information in the Traps bar is displayed, See Figure C-23.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-35

Figure C-23 SNMP Service Properties

Step 10 Click the Security tab. See Figure C-24. Then click OK.
NOTE

Under Accepted community names, make sure that the name of Community is public and that Rights
of public is READ ONLY.

C-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure C-24 SNMP Service Properties

----End

C.6.3 Installing the SCSI SNMP

The iGWB uses the SCSI SNMP agent software to monitor disk arrays. This section describes
how to install the SCSI SNMP.

Context
In general, the SCSI SNMP is installed before an IBM server is delivered. Therefore, you only
need to check that.

The SCSI SNMP is installed if one of the following requirements is met:

l In C:\WINDOWS, you can find the files LSI_StorSNMP.ini and scsi_mib.dat.
l In Add/Remove Windows Components on the control panel, you can find LSI SCSI
Storage SNMP Agent v3.04-0001.

Procedure
Step 1 Download the software package LSI1030_SNMP_Installer-3.04-0001.rar from ftp://cse.
8800.org/huawei and then save it locally. After decompressing it, upload it to the IBM server.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-37

NOTE

At ftp://cse.8800.org/huawei, enter the user name extguest and the password 4ibmer2guest.

Step 2 In SCSI_SNMP_Windows_Installer-3.04-0001\Setup\DISK1, double-click setup.exe.

The InstallShield Wizard dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-25.

Figure C-25 InstallShield Wizard

About 10 seconds later, the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for LSI SCSI Storage
SNMP Agent v3.04-0001 dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-26.

C-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure C-26 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for LSI SCSI Storage SNMP Agent
v3.04-0001

Step 3 Click Next. See Figure C-27.

The License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-27.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-39

Figure C-27 License Agreement

Step 4 Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and then click Next.
The Customer Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-28.

C-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure C-28 Customer Information

Step 5 Enter proper information in User Name and Organization, and then click Next.
The Setup Type dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-29.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-41

Figure C-29 Setup Type

Step 6 Select Complete and then click Next.

The Ready to Install the Program dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-30.

C-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure C-30 Ready to Install the Program

Step 7 Click Install.

The installation progress is displayed. About three seconds later, the InstallShield Wizard
Completed dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-31.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-43

Figure C-31 InstallShield Wizard Completed

Step 8 Click Finish.

The OS is restarted.

The SNMP - Service To be restarted window is displayed. See Figure C-32.

Figure C-32 SNMP - Service To be restarted

C-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

After about five seconds the SNMP - Service To be restarted window disappears.

----End

C.6.4 Installing the ISM

The ISM is a type of agent software used for an IBM x3650T server to monitor its hardware.
This section describes how to install the ISM.

Prerequisite
l The SNMP service is installed.
l The version of the Internet Explorer is 6.0 or later.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the Intel System Manager CD into the CD-ROM drive.

Step 2 Double-click setup.exe in ISM\ism\Software.

Step 3 In Welcome to Intel(R) Server Manager Setup, click Start. See Figure C-33.

Figure C-33 Welcome to Intel(R) Server Manager Setup

Step 4 In License Agreement, click Accept.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-45

Step 5 In Local Computer Details, click Next. See Figure C-34.

Figure C-34 Local Computer Details

Step 6 In Installation Method, use the default option Local InstallLocal Install and then click Next.
Step 7 In Installation Options, use the default option Server Install(Primary Agents) and then click
Next. See Figure C-35.

C-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure C-35 Installation Options

Step 8 In Local System, enter the BMC password and then click Next. See Figure C-36.
NOTE

The BMC password contains not less than eight digits.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-47

Figure C-36 Local System

Step 9 In the Confirmation dialog box, click Install Now. See Figure C-37.

C-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure C-37 Confirmation

Step 10 After the installation, click Reboot Now in the System Shutdown dialog box. See Figure
C-38.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-49

Figure C-38 System Shutdown

----End

C.6.5 Checking the Hardware Monitoring Function

After configuring the SNMP service, and installing the SCSI SNMP and the ISM, you need to
check the hardware monitoring function of the IBM x3650T server.

Prerequisite
l The SNMP service is configured and the SCSI SNMP and the ISM are installed.
l The iGWB Server and the iGWB Client are installed and configured.

C-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

CAUTION
Remove only one disk at a time. If you remove two or more disks, data on the disks may be lost.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the iGWB debugging console. In the Debuginfo main interface, make sure that the
critical alarm iGWB Power Failure with the ID of 67 and the critical alarm iGWB Disk
Failure with the ID of 37 are not generated.
Step 2 Remove a power module from the IBM x3650T server. In the Debuginfo main interface, check
that the critical alarm iGWB Power Failure with the ID of 67 is generated.
Step 3 Insert the removed power module into the IBM x3650T server.
The critical alarm iGWB Power Failure with the ID of 67 is cleared.
Step 4 Remove a disk from the IBM x3650T server. In the Debuginfo main interface, check that the
critical alarm with the ID of 37 is generated.
Step 5 Insert the removed disk into the IBM x3650T server.
The critical alarm iGWB Disk Failure with the ID of 37 is cleared.

NOTE

It takes a certain time to restore the data on the disk after the alarm iGWB Disk Failure is cleared.

----End

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-51

D Installing HP ProLiant DL380 G5 Server

This appendix introduces how to install and configure the HP ProLiant DL380 G5 server
D.1 Installation Procedure
This section describes the operation procedure for installing the operating system on the HP
380G5 server.
D.2 Installation Planning
This section describes the installation planning such as IP address planning, user planning, and
partition planning. After reading this section, you can easily and quickly install the OS and
configure it to meet the requirements of the iGWB.
D.3 Installation Prerequisites
This section describes the installation prerequisites such as checking the software and hardware
of an HP 380G5 server.
D.4 Installing Hardware
This section describes the hardware of an HP 380G5 server and the cable connections of the
iGWB. Before connecting the cables, you need to complete the installation of a cabinet and the
components in the cabinet.
D.5 Installing and Configuring Windows 2000 Server
This section describes how to install and configure Windows 2000 Server on a iGWB server.
D.6 Installing the SCSI SNMP and Insight management
This section describes how to install the SCSI SNMP and the Insight management, which are
used to monitor hard disks and power supplies.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-1

D.1 Installation Procedure

This section describes the operation procedure for installing the operating system on the HP
380G5 server.
Figure D-1 shows the installation procedure of HP server.

Figure D-1 Installation flow of HP server

1. Hardware Start
Installation

Install a cabinet and its

internal compoents

Connect Cables

2. OS Installation
and Configuration Set the BIOS

Configure hard disks as

RAID 5+hot spare

Initialize the HP 380G5

Server

Install Windows Server 2000

Install hotfixed for Windows

2000 Server

Create disk partitions

Configure IP addresses of
network adapters

End

D-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

D.2 Installation Planning

This section describes the installation planning such as IP address planning, user planning, and
partition planning. After reading this section, you can easily and quickly install the OS and
configure it to meet the requirements of the iGWB.
D.2.1 IP Address Planning
Before installing the iGWB, you need to plan IP addresses according to the requirements of the
office. This section describes the principles of configuring IP addresses and related precautions.
This section also provides suggested IP addresses.
D.2.2 User Planning
The iGWB involves multiple types of users, such as the OS user on an iGWB server, the OS
user on an MT, the FTP user on a BS, the administrator of the iGWB, and the normal user of
the iGWB. Before installing the iGWB, you need to plan users.
D.2.3 Partition Planning
This section describes the planning for the partitions of the hard disks on an HP 380G5 server.

D.2.1 IP Address Planning

If any network adapter name is inconsistent with that listed in Table D-1, reconfigure the network adapter
name. For details, see A.5.6 Configuring Network Adapters in A Installing an OS on a Dell 2950
Server, B.5.5 Configuring Network Adapters in B Installing an OS on an IBM x3650 Server, C.5.8
Configuring Network Adapters in C Installing an OS on an IBM x3650T Server, orD.5.7 Configuring
Network Adapters in D Installing HP ProLiant DL380 G5 Server.

Table D-1 Planned IP addresses

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP
Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Primary iGWB Network This network 129.9.1.2/ 129.9.1.1

server iGWB0 adapter 0 to adapter 255.255.255.0
office LAN connects
iGWB0 to an
MT and
functions as an
NMS interface.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-3

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Network This network 130.1.3.1/ 172.30.200.1

Network This network Configure the Do not

adapter 3 to BC adapter fixed IP address configure the
connects or the subnet virtual IP
iGWB0 to a BC mask according address.
and functions as to actual
a charging situations.
interface.

D-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Secondary Network This network 129.9.1.3/ 129.9.1.1

iGWB server adapter 0 to adapter 255.255.255.0
iGWB1 office LAN connects
iGWB1 to an
MT and
functions as an
NMS interface.

Network This network 130.1.3.2/ 172.30.200.1

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-5

Server Network Description Fixed IP Virtual IP

Adapter Address or Address
Name Subnet Mask

Network This network Configure the Do not

adapter 3 to BC adapter fixed IP address configure the
connects or the subnet virtual IP
iGWB1 to a BC mask according address.
and functions as to actual
a charging situations.
interface.

NOTE

D.2.2 User Planning

See Table D-2 and plan OS users. See Table D-3 and plan iGWB users.

Table D-2 Planned OS users

User Role Description User Name Password

Administrator An administrator has administrator The default password

all the permissions. is igwb.

FTP user A BS accesses the BS is recommended. BS is recommended.

D-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

User Role Description User Name Password

The iGWB transfers The user name is

CDR files to a BS as configured by the
an FTP user. This BS.
user is created by the
BS. The BS needs to
notify the iGWB of
the user name.

An iGWB server You need to

The iGWB backs up The user name is

Table D-3 Planned iGWB users

User Role Description User Name Password

iGWB administrator An administrator of l admin The password is left

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-7

D.2.3 Partition Planning

This section describes the planning for the partitions of the hard disks on an HP 380G5 server.

NOTE

The actual disk space may vary from the nominal disk space. Plan the space of drive D and drive E in the
proportion of 1:1.

Table D-4 Planned partitions of the hard disks on an HP 380G5 server

Partition Size Description

C 8 GB This partition is used to install the OS and the

iGWB Server.

D 215 GB This partition is used to store original CDR

files, log files, and status files.

E 215 GB This partition is used to store final CDR files,

backup files, and status files.

G - This partition is used as a CD-ROM drive.

D.3 Installation Prerequisites

This section describes the installation prerequisites such as checking the software and hardware
of an HP 380G5 server.
D.3.1 Check Server Hardware Configurations
Before installing the OS, you need to check the hardware of each HP 380G5 server. This section
describes the hardware of each HP 380G5 server.
D.3.2 Checking Software
Before installing the OS, you need to check the software of each HP 380G5 server.

D.3.1 Check Server Hardware Configurations

Before installing the OS, you need to check the hardware of each HP 380G5 server. This section
describes the hardware of each HP 380G5 server.

Context
NOTE

l Because servers are upgraded frequently, the hardware of HP 380G5 servers may vary according to
actual situations. In this case, refer to the packing list.
l The iGWB uses two HP 380G5 servers configured with the same hardware. One functions as the
primary iGWB server. The other functions as the secondary iGWB server.

Procedure
Table D-5 lists the hardware of each HP 380G5 server.

D-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Table D-5 HP 380G5 server basic configurations

Item Configuration details

CPU 1×Xeon E5405 2.0G or higher

Hard disk 5×146GB SAS(RAID 5+Hotspare)

Memory 4×256MB

Network adapter 2×PCI network adapters

2×PCI-E network adapters

RAID adapter One ServeRAID---E200 RAID adapter

----End

D.3.2 Checking Software

Before installing the OS, you need to check the software of each HP 380G5 server.

Context
NOTE

l Because servers are upgraded frequently, the software of HP 380G5 servers may vary according to
actual situations. In this case, refer to the packing list.
l iGWBThe iGWB uses two HP 380G5 servers configured with the same software. One functions as the
primary iGWB server. The other functions as the secondary iGWB server.

Procedure
Table D-6 lists the software of each HP 380G5 server.

Table D-6 HP 380G5 server software configurations

Software(CD) Purpose

HP SmartStart CD To boot an HPserver

----End

D.4 Installing Hardware

This section describes the hardware of an HP 380G5 server and the cable connections of the
iGWB. Before connecting the cables, you need to complete the installation of a cabinet and the
components in the cabinet.
D.4.1 Structural Views of an HP 380G5 Server
This section describes the structural views of the HP 380G5 server, including the back views
and front views, to prepare for the cable connecting.
D.4.2 Connecting Cables

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-9

D.4.1 Structural Views of an HP 380G5 Server

This section describes the structural views of the HP 380G5 server, including the back views
and front views, to prepare for the cable connecting.

Front view
Figure D-2 shows the front view of an HP 380G5 server(from sever front).

Figure D-2 HP 380G5 Front view of the HP server

A B C D

A CD-ROM drive B Video connector

C USB Port D Hard drive bays(holding 8 hard drives)

A row of indicators are configured on the right of the front panel, see Figure D-3.

Figure D-3 Indicators on the front panel

A B C D E F

A UID indicator B Internal state indicator

D-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

C External state indicator D NIC1 connection indicator

E NIC2 connection indicator F Power switch indicator

Back view
Figure D-4 HP 380G5 sever view(from sever back).

Figure D-4 HP 380G5 Back view of the HP server

A B C D E F G

T S R Q P O N M L K J I H

A T-10/T-15 Torx screwdriver B NIC connection port(for 3# network interface)

C External option blank D NIC connection port(for 2# network interface)
E Power supply bay 2 F Power socket
G Power supply bay 1 (populated) H iLO2 connection port
I Video connector J USB connection port(2)
K Serial connector L Mouse connection port
M Keyboard interface N PCI extension slot(1)(for 2# network adapter)
O NIC connection port(for 0# network interface) P NIC connection port(for 1# network interface)
Q PCI extension slot(2)(for 3# network adapter) R Extension slot(3)
S Extension slot(4) T Extension slot(5)

D.4.2 Connecting Cables

Connecting Power Cables

The input voltage for the HP ProLiant DL380 G5 server is -48V DC. The server uses the dual
redundant power supplies to ensure that the server can keep running normally when only one
power supply is available.

To connect the power cables, ensure that the positive pole of the power terminal of the server is
connected to the grounding terminal of the -48V DC power supply and the negative pole is
connected to the -48V end of the power supply.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-11

Connecting Network Cable

The HP ProLiant DL380 G5 server provides four network ports. The network adapters are set
on the back of the HP server cabinet. See Figure D-5. These ports are numbered for description
purpose. See Table D-7, Make sure that you follow this table to connect the network cables.

Figure D-5 Network adapters on the back of the HP server cabinet

Connecting to a BC Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch
(Network interface 3) (Network interface 2)

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 1)

Connecting to an NMS or an MT Primary link between the iGWB and a softswitch

Table D-7 Network adapter numbering plan

Position No. Function

Lower port of the PCI 0 This network interface connects to an NMS or an

network adapter MT.

Upper port of the PCI 1 This network interface connects to LAN switch 0.
network adapter The iGWB communicates with the primary plane
of an SOFTX3000 through this network interface.

Network adapter in the 2 This network interface connects to LAN switch 1.

PCI extension slot(2) The iGWB communicates with the secondary plane
of an SOFTX3000 through this network interface.

Network adapter in the 3 This network interface connects to a billing center

PCI extension slot(1) and functions as a charging interface.

NOTE

The numbering principle is: When viewed from the back, the ports are numbered in sequence from left to
right and from the top down.

Connecting COM Port Cable

The COM port cables are used to connect the COM ports of two serversiGWB to provide the
second heartbeat connection. The position of the COM port is (4) as shown in Figure D-6, and
it is an RS-232 port.

D-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure D-6 Connecting COM Port Cable

iGWB1

iGWB0

Connecting C2T Cables

The C2T cables are used to connect the servers with the display, the keyboard, and the mouse.
To save space, two iGWB servers and the BAM server use one set of monitor, keyboard, and
mouse, switched by the KVMS. The servers connect to the KVMS through C2T cables.
C2T cables include keyboard cable, mouse cable, and monitor cable. The cables are all built-in,
with the two ends connecting the KVMS with the keyboard, mouse, and monitor. The BAM
connects to the PC1 interface, the iGWB0 connects to the PC2 interface, and the iGWB1 connects
to the PC3 interface. Figure D-7 shows the interfaces at the back of the KVMS.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-13

Figure D-7 Connecting C2T Cables

KVMS

pc4 pc3 pc2 pc1

Connecting to a BAM Server
iGWB1

iGWB0

Video Cable
Mouse & Keyboard Cable

D.5 Installing and Configuring Windows 2000 Server

This section describes how to install and configure Windows 2000 Server on a iGWB server.

Context
NOTE

D.5.1 Setting the BIOS of the HP 380G5 Server

This section describes how to set the BIOS of the HP 380G5 Server.
D.5.2 Configuring Hard Disks as RAID 5+Hot Spare
To ensure stable running, the iGWB uses the RAID-5 error tolerance technology. This section
describes how to configure the hard disks of an HP 380G5 server as RAID 5+hot spare.
D.5.3 Initializing the HP 380G5 Server
This section describes how to initialize the HP 380G5 server.
D.5.4 Installing Windows 2000 Server

D-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

This section describes how to install Windows 2000 Server on an HP 380G5 server.
D.5.5 Install Hotfixes for the OS
For security purposes, you need to install the hotfixes for the OS, released by Microsoft, on each
Dell 2950 server. This section describes how to install the hotfixes for the OS on each Dell 2950
server.
D.5.6 Configuring Partitions
You can use the disk management tool provided by Windows 2000 Server to create partitions
and set drive letters on a Dell 2950 server according to the partition planning.
D.5.7 Configuring Network Adapters
Before using the network adapters, you need to check their status, rename them, and configure
the IP addresses of the network interfaces.

D.5.1 Setting the BIOS of the HP 380G5 Server

This section describes how to set the BIOS of the HP 380G5 Server.

Context
The basic input/output system (BIOS) setup is important to start a server or install an OS. For
the HP 380G5 server, follow the steps below to adjust the BIOS setup.

Procedure
Step 1 Start the server.
The system then detects the memory. When Press Ctrl+S to Enter Configuration Menu is
displayed at the lower left corner of the screen, you will find the following message on your
screen:
Press"F9" key for ROM-Based Setup Utility Press "F10" key for System Maintenance
Menu Press "F12" key for PXE boot

Press F9 to display the Rom-Based Setup Utility interface.

Step 2 Select Standard Boot Order(IPL), and then press Enter to view the boot order.
See below:
IPL :1 CD-ROM
IPL :2 Floppy Drive(A:)
IPL :3 USB Drivekey(C:)
IPL :4 Hard Drive C;(See Boot Controller Order)
IPL :5 PCI Embeded HP NC373i Multifunction gigabit Adapter
If CD-ROM is not in line 1, change the order with the arrow keys. Then, press Enter.
Step 3 Press F10 to save the settings.
Step 4 Press F10 to quit the BIOS setup.

----End

D.5.2 Configuring Hard Disks as RAID 5+Hot Spare

To ensure stable running, the iGWB uses the RAID-5 error tolerance technology. This section
describes how to configure the hard disks of an HP 380G5 server as RAID 5+hot spare.

Context
RAID configuration on the server is required before installing the Windows 2000 Server.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-15

A Dell 2950 server is configured with five built-in 146 GB hard disks. To ensure stable running,
the iGWB uses the RAID-5 error tolerance technology. Typically, each server is configured with
five hard disks. Four of these disks are set to RAID 5, while the left is set to hot spare.

Procedure
Step 1 Power on the HP server. Remove any CD in the CD-ROM. Then, start the server. If the server
was previously started, shut down the server and restart it.
Step 2 The server reads the boot program from the BIOS. Then, it asks if you want to configure the
Integrated Lights-Out (ILO). See below:
Integrated Lights-Out press [F8] to configure
Do not set the ILO. Then, the system will continue.
Step 3 The following information is displayed:
Press F8 to run the Option ROM Configuration for Arrays Utility Press ESC to skip
configuration and continue
Press F8 to run the disk array configuration utility. The configuration main menu is displayed.
See Figure D-8.

Figure D-8 Main Menu

Step 4 SelectView Logical Driveand then pressEnter.

l If the following information is displayed:
Logical Drive # 1, RAID 5, 203.5 GB, OK
It indicates that the system has configured the logical drives and the hard disks have been set
to RAID 5. You do not need to continue the configuration process. Press ESC to exit.
l If the following information is displayed:
There are no available logical drives. Press ESC to return to the main menu
It indicates that the system has not yet configured the logical dives. Then, you must continue
with the configuration process.
NOTE

If the logical drives were previously configured but not set to RAID 5, select Delete Logical Drive from the
main menu to delete the existing logical drives, and then select Create Logical Drive to create logical drives.
See Figure D-8.

Step 5 SelectCreate Logical Driveand then pressEnterThe RAID configurations interface is

displayed. See Figure D-9.

D-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure D-9 RAID configurations

NOTE
There are four areas on the interface:
l In Available Physical Drives, all the available existing physical drives are listed.
l In Raid Configurations, the RAID types are listed.
l In Spare, you can set a hot spare drive.
l In Maximum Boot partition, you set the capacity of the Boot partition.
PressTabto switch to the next area, and pressSpace Bar to select the desired options.

Step 6 Set disks to the RAID 5+hot spare.

1. In Available Physical Drives select the physical disks to be set to RAID. EachiGWB server
contains five disks. Select four as RAID and leave one as hot spare disk.
2. In Raid Configurations, select RAID 5.
3. In Spare, select Use one drive as spare.
4. In Maximum Boot partition, select Enable (8 GB maximum).
5. After you finish, the interface, as shown in Figure D-10 is displayed. Check your settings,
and then press Enter. The following information is displayed:
You have selected a logical drive with a total data size of 203.5 GB and RAID
5 fault tolerance.
Press F8 to save the Configuration
Press ESC to cancel

Figure D-10 RAID 5 configurations

6. PressF8to save the configurations. PressEnterto continue. PressESCto cancel.

----End

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-17

D.5.3 Initializing the HP 380G5 Server

This section describes how to initialize the HP 380G5 server.

Procedure
Step 1 Power on the server. Insert the HP SmartStart CD into the CD-ROM drive. After the server is
started, run the HP SmartStart program in the CD.

Step 2 Select the language and keyboard

1. Select the language to use during the SmartStart process, for example, English.
2. Select the keyboard to be used with this system. Select English.
3. After you finish, click Continue.

Step 3 In the END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT dialog box, read the END-USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) carefully. Click Agree to continue.

Step 4 In the Main Options dialog box, click Deploy server to display the Hardware
Configuration dialog box. Click Continue.
NOTE

On the wizard interface, the upper part displays the hardware information, such as server type, ROM version,
and RAM size, and the lower part displays the hardware configuration. The View PCI Information icon is in
the middle, by clicking it you can view the PCI information.

Step 5 In the Operating System Selection dialog box, Select Microsoft Windows 2000 Server from
the Select specific operating system version list. Click Continue.

Step 6 In the Operating System Media Resource dialog box, keep the default settings. Click Next to
continue.

Step 7 Set boot partition size.

1. In the Boot Partition Options dialog box, select NTFS from the Select a file system list
as the file system of the server.
2. In the Select Boot Partition Size area, select Custom to customize the boot partition size.
Enter 8192 (8 GB) in the right entry box. Click Next to continue.

Step 8 Configure OS.

1. In the Operating System Configuration Information dialog box, enter the user names in
the User Name entry box. Enter iGWB0 for the primary server and iGWB1 for the
secondary server.
2. In the Organization Name entry box, enter Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3. In the Product Key entry box, enter the serial number of the product.
The serial number is marked on the cover or the specifications of the Windows 2000 Server
CD delivered with the product.
4. In the License Type entry box, select Per Server. Enter the number of Client Licenses,
for example, 60 based on the EULA. Click Next to continue.
5. In the SNMP Configuration dialog box, keep the default settings. Click Next to continue.

Step 9 In the Ready to intalldialog box, Click Next to continue.

When the information
Please insert the operating system CD and click Continue

D-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

is displayed, the HP SmartStart CD is ejected from the CD-ROM drive automatically.

Step 10 Remove this CD and insert the Windows 2000 Server CD in the CD-ROM drive. Click
Continue.
SmartStart is now copying theWindows 2000 Server installation files to the local disk. On the
screen it displays as follows:
Please wait.
SmartStart will now configuration your system and reboot. Please remove the
operating system CD during reboot.
Copying data files…

Step 11 When the system finishes copying files, the server automatically reboots. Remove Windows
2000 Server CD and continue with the setup process.

----End

D.5.4 Installing Windows 2000 Server

This section describes how to install Windows 2000 Server on an HP 380G5 server.

Procedure
Step 1 When the server reboots, the Windows 2000 Server Setup window is displayed, and then the
system starts copying files.
Step 2 When finishing copying files, the system reboots twice. The Installing Devices dialog box is
displayed. The system starts to detect devices such as keyboard, mouse, video adapter, and
network adapter, and install the drivers for these devices automatically.
Step 3 The Regional Setting dialog box is displayed. Set the correct Language for the server. Set the
Regional depending on the area you are located. Click Next to continue.
Step 4 In the Computer Name and Administrator Password dialog box, enter the computer name
and administrator password. The factory defaults are as follows:
l For Computer Name the primary server is iGWB0, and the secondary server is iGWB1.
l For Administrator Password, it is preset to igwb.
Click Next to continue.
Step 5 In the Date And Time Settings dialog box, set the correct date and time for the server. Set the
Regional depending on the area you are located. For example, GMT+08:00 (Beijing,
Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi). Click Next to continue.
Step 6 In the Workgroup and Computer Domain dialog box, select No, this computer is not on a
network … . In the Workgroup or computer domain: dialog box, keep the default value
WORKGROUP. Click Next to continue.
Step 7 Setup is now installing Windows 2000 Server, including installing Windows 2000 Server
components and the Start menu, registering software, saving settings, and deleting temporary
files. The process takes about 10 minutes. Then, the server restarts automatically.
Step 8 Log in as Administrator. The HP Installation Utility window is displayed. The system will
automatically install and configure the HP utility. It takes about 15 minutes.
Step 9 After the utility is installed, the server restarts automatically. Now, the Windows 2000 Server
setup process is complete.

----End

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-19

D.5.5 Install Hotfixes for the OS

Context
This section takes KB823980 as an example. To install KB823980 on a Dell 2950 server, do as
follows:

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to Windows 2000 Server as an administrator.

Step 2 Double-click the Windows2000-KB823980-x86.exe file downloaded from the Web site of
Microsoft. The Software Update Installation Wizard is started. See Figure D-11. Click Next.

Figure D-11 KB823980 Setup Welcome

Step 3 In the displayed dialog box, select I Agree. Then click Next.

D-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

In the displayed dialog box, the message that the hotfix is updating Windows 2000 Server is
displayed. In about 30 seconds, updating Windows 2000 Server is complete. In the displayed
dialog box, the message that the hotfix is installed on the Dell 2950 server is displayed.
Step 4 Click Finish.

----End

D.5.6 Configuring Partitions

You can use the disk management tool provided by Windows 2000 Server to create partitions
and set drive letters on a Dell 2950 server according to the partition planning.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management. The Computer
Management window is displayed.
Step 2 Change the drive letter for the CD-ROM drive.
1. In the navigation tree of the Computer Management window, choose Storage > Disk
Management.
The information about the current partitions on the Dell 2950 server is displayed in the
right pane of the Computer Management window.
2. Right-click the drive letter for the CD-ROM drive and choose Change Drive Letter and
Path.
3. In the Change Drive Letter and Paths for (D:) dialog box, click Change…. In the Change
Drive Letter or Path dialog box, select F from the drop-down list box on the right. Then
click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
4. Click Yes. The drive letter is changed to F.
Step 3 Create an expanded partition.
1. In Disk 0, right-click Unallocated and choose New Partition. In the Create Partition
Wizard dialog box, click Next.
The Select Partition Type dialog box is displayed.
2. In Select the type of partition you want to create, select Extended partition. Then click
Next.
The Specify Partition Size dialog box is displayed.
3. Use the default value to set the partition size to the maximum free disk space. Then click
Next.
The Completing the Create Partition Wizard dialog box is displayed.
4. Check the settings. Then click Finish.
In Disk 1, Unallocated is changed to Free Space.
Step 4 Create logical drive D.
1. In Disk 1, right-click Free Space and choose New Logical Drive. In the New Partition
Wizard dialog box, click Next.
2. The Select Partition Type dialog box is displayed. By default, in Select the type of
partition you want to create, Logical Drive is selected. Click Next.
The Specify Partition Size dialog box is displayed.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-21

3. In Partition size in MB, enter a value, for example, 219136, to specify the partition size
for drive D. Then click Next.
The Assign Drive Letter or Path dialog box is displayed.

----End

D.5.7 Configuring Network Adapters

Before using the network adapters, you need to check their status, rename them, and configure
the IP addresses of the network interfaces.

D-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure D-12 Network and Dial-up Connections

2. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, check whether the network adapters
are installed successfully according to the network connection icons. Table D-8 lists the
items for checking whether the network adapters are installed successfully.

Table D-8 Items for checking whether the network adapters are installed successfully

Item Result

Check whether each network connection If a network connection icon is displayed

icon is displayed as . as , you can infer that the

corresponding network adapter is installed
successfully and connected properly.

Check whether any network connection If any network connection icon is

icon is displayed as . displayed as , you can infer that the

corresponding network adapter is installed
successfully but connected improperly. In
this case, you need to check cable
connections.

Check whether the network connection If the network connection icon

Step 2 Check the correspondence between the network adapters and their names, and then rename the
network adapters.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-23

NOTE

The network adapters are installed at the back of the HP 380G5 server. Figure D-13 shows the
connections between the network adapters and other NEs.

Figure D-13 Connections between the network adapters and other NEs
Connecting to a BC Secondary link between the iGWB and a softswitch
(Network interface 3) (Network interface 2)

(Network interface 0) (Network interface 1)

Connecting to an NMS or an MT Primary link between the iGWB and a softswitch

1. Remove all the network cables connecting the network adapters of the HP 380G5 server
to other NEs.
In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, all the network connection icons are

You are recommended to rename the other three network adapters Network adapter 2 to 1#LAN
Switch, Network adapter 0 to Office LAN, and Network adapter 3 to Billing Center respectively.

Step 3 Configure the IP addresses of the network interfaces.

NOTE

See D.2.1 IP Address Planning to configure the IP addresses of the four network adapters on each HP
380G5 server. This section takes network interface 1 on the HP 380G5 server functioning as the primary
iGWB server as an example and describes how to configure the IP address to 129.1.1.1.
1. On the desktop of Windows 2000 Server, right-click My Network Places and choose
Properties.

D-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

2. In the displayed window, right-click Network adapter 0 to Office LAN and choose
Properties.
3. Double-click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Select Use the following IP address, and then
set the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway parameters as follows:

IP address 129.1.1.1
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway (Set the default gateway according to actual situations.)

4. Click OK.

----End

D.6 Installing the SCSI SNMP and Insight management

This section describes how to install the SCSI SNMP and the Insight management, which are
used to monitor hard disks and power supplies.
D.6.1 Principle of Monitoring the Hardware
This section describes the principle of monitoring the hardware based on the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
D.6.2 Installing and Configuring the SNMP Service
SNMP-based hardware monitoring is widely used in the field. Before you install the hardware
monitoring software, you need to install and configure the SNMP service.
D.6.3 Installing the Insight Manager
The Insight Manage is a type of agent software used by an HP server to monitor its hardware.
D.6.4 Checking the Hardware Monitoring Function
After configuring the SNMP service, and installing the Insight Manager, you need to check the
hardware monitoring function of the HP 380G5 server.

D.6.1 Principle of Monitoring the Hardware

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-25

D.6.2 Installing and Configuring the SNMP Service

SNMP-based hardware monitoring is widely used in the field. Before you install the hardware
monitoring software, you need to install and configure the SNMP service.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Settings > Control Panel.
The Control Panel window is displayed.

Step 2 Double-click Add or Remove Programs.

The Add or Remove Programs window is displayed.

Step 3 On the left of the Add or Remove Programs window, click Add/Remove Windows
Components.
The Windows Components Wizard dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure D-14.
NOTE

Insert the Windows installation CD when the relevant prompt is displayed.

Figure D-14 Windows Components Wizard

Step 4 In the Components drop-down list box of Windows Components Wizard, choose
Management and Monitoring Tools, click Details... .

The Management and Monitoring Tools dialog box is displayed. See Figure D-15.

D-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure D-15 Management and Monitoring Tools

Step 8 Double-click SNMP Service. The SNMP Service Properties dialog box is displayed. Click the
Traps tab, enter public in Community name, and then click Add to list. See Figure D-16.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-27

Figure D-16 SNMP Service Properties

Figure D-17 SNMP Service Configuration

The configuration information in the Traps bar is displayed, See Figure D-18.

D-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure D-18 SNMP Service Properties

Step 10 Click the Security tab. See Figure D-19. Then click OK.
NOTE

Under Accepted community names, make sure that the name of Community is public and that Rights
of public is READ ONLY.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-29

Figure D-19 SNMP Service Properties

----End

D.6.3 Installing the Insight Manager

The Insight Manage is a type of agent software used by an HP server to monitor its hardware.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the SmartStart CD-Rom into the CD-Rom drive. The HP END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT window gets displayed. Click Agree to continue.
The main window of the SmartStart CD as shown in Figure D-20 gets displayed.

D-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure D-20 HP SmartStart Home

Step 2 Click the Software tab. Click Install Proliant Support Pack in the Software window. Figure
D-21 shows the Software window.

Figure D-21 HP SmartStart Software

Step 3 Click Custom installation of the PSP for Windows 2000 in the displayed Install Proliant
Support Pack as shown in Figure D-22.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-31

Figure D-22 HP SmartStart Software

Step 4 The HP Remote Deployment Utility window gets displayed. In the navigation tree on the left,
choose Microsoft Windows 2000 > Software-System Management > HP Insight
Management Agents for Windows 2000/Windows Server 2003 version 7.60.0.0(Engilsh
(US),Japanese). Click Install on the toolbar. Figure D-23 shows the HP Remote Deployment
Utility window.

Figure D-23 HP Remote Deployment Utility

D-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Step 5 The Set Installation Option dialog box gets displayed. Click Next to continue.
Step 6 The Installationdialog box gets displayed. Click Next to continue.
The system start to copy and install the files.
Step 7 7. The Insight Manager is installed. The Finish window gets displayed. Click Finish to complete
the installation.

----End

D.6.4 Checking the Hardware Monitoring Function

After configuring the SNMP service, and installing the Insight Manager, you need to check the
hardware monitoring function of the HP 380G5 server.

Prerequisite
l The SNMP service is configured and the Insight Manager are installed.
l The iGWB Server and the iGWB Client are installed and configured.

CAUTION
Remove only one disk at a time. If you remove two or more disks, data on the disks may be lost.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the iGWB debugging console. In the Debuginfo main interface, make sure that the
critical alarm iGWB Power Failure with the ID of 67 and the critical alarm iGWB Disk
Failure with the ID of 37 are not generated.
Step 2 Remove a power module from the HP 380G5 server. In the Debuginfo main interface, check
that the critical alarm iGWB Power Failure with the ID of 67 is generated.
Step 3 Insert the removed power module into the HP 380G5 server.
The critical alarm iGWB Power Failure with the ID of 67 is cleared.
Step 4 Remove a disk from the HP 380G5 server. In the Debuginfo main interface, check that the
critical alarm with the ID of 37 is generated.
Step 5 Insert the removed disk into the HP 380G5 server.
The critical alarm iGWB Disk Failure with the ID of 37 is cleared.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-33

NOTE

It takes a certain time to restore the data on the disk after the alarm iGWB Disk Failure is cleared.

----End

D-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

E Using a Tape Drive

This section describes how to install a tape drive and how to use the tape drive to back up and
restore CDR files.
E.1 Installing a Tape Drive
The tape drive is an optional accessory. You can determine whether to install the tape drive
according to the contract signed by the carrier and the device provider.
E.2 Using a Tape Drive to Back Up CDR Files
This section describes how to use a tape drive to back up CDR files.
E.3 Using a Tape Drive to Restore CDR Files
This section describes how to use a tape drive to restore CDR files.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential E-1

E.1 Installing a Tape Drive

The tape drive is an optional accessory. You can determine whether to install the tape drive
according to the contract signed by the carrier and the device provider.
E.1.1 Connecting a Tape Driver to the iGWB Server
A tape drive connects to the iGWB server through the SCSI interface. This section describes
how to connect a tape drive to the iGWB server.
E.1.2 Installing the SCSI Driver
Before using a tape drive, install the related SCSI driver. This section describes how to install
the SCSI driver.
E.1.3 Installing the Driver of a Tape Drive
This section describes how to install the driver of a tape drive.

E.1.1 Connecting a Tape Driver to the iGWB Server

A tape drive connects to the iGWB server through the SCSI interface. This section describes
how to connect a tape drive to the iGWB server.

Context
The iGWB server backs up CDR files on a tape drive through an SCSI card. Therefore, you need
to install an SCSI card on the iGWB server and then connect the iGWB server to the tape drive
through an SCSI cable.
NOTE

The SCSI card and the SCSI cable are delivered along with the tape drive.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the SCSI card on the iGWB server.

Step 2 Connect the tape drive to the iGWB server.

1. Connect the bigger connector of the SCSI cable to the SCSI A port of the tape drive.
2. Connect the smaller connector of the SCSI cable to the SCSI Channel A LVD/SE of the
SCSI card.

----End

E.1.2 Installing the SCSI Driver

Before using a tape drive, install the related SCSI driver. This section describes how to install
the SCSI driver.

Context
NOTE

l The installation CD-ROM of the SCSI driver is hp controller products documentation.

l If the SCSI card has two SCSI channels, install the drive for both the channels.

E-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the installation CD-ROM of the SCSI driver.
The Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box is displayed. See Figure
E-1.

Figure E-1 Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard

Step 2 Click Next.

The Install Hardware Device Drivers dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-2.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential E-3

Figure E-2 Install Hardware Device Drivers

Step 3 Click Next.

The Locate Driver Files dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-3.

E-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure E-3 Locate Driver Files

Step 4 Select the CD-ROM drives check box and then click Next to start installing the SCSI driver.
The Driver Files Search Results dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-4.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential E-5

Figure E-4 Driver Files Search Results

Step 5 Click Next.

The Digital Signature Not Found dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-5.

Figure E-5 Digital Signature Not Found

E-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Step 6 Click Yes.

The Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Click Finish.
Step 8 Check whether the driver is successfully installed.
1. On the desktop, right-click My Computer and then choose Properties.
The System Properties dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Hardware tab. Then click Device Manager.
The Device Manager dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-6.

Figure E-6 Device Manager

3. In the Device Manager dialog box, check whether the SCSI card is displayed under SCSI
and RAID controllers. For example, if you see LSI Adapter, Ultra320 SCSI 2000 series
(with 1020/1030) under SCSI and RAID controllers, it indicates that the SCSI driver is
successfully installed. See Figure E-6.

----End

E.1.3 Installing the Driver of a Tape Drive

This section describes how to install the driver of a tape drive.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential E-7

Context
NOTE

No driver disk is provided for the tape drive. Therefore, you need to obtain the driver of the tape drive from HP
corporation. The iGWB uses the HP C7438A SCSI Sequential Device tape drive to back up CDR files.

Procedure
Step 1 Run DrvInstaller to start the InstallShield Wizard. In the Welcome to the InstallShield
WiZard for HP DAT and USB Mass Storage Drivers Installer dialog box, click Next.
The License Agreement dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-7.

Figure E-7 License Agreement

Step 2 After carefully reading the agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and
then click Next.
The Ready to Install the Program dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-8.

E-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure E-8 Ready to Install the Program

Step 3 Click Install.

The InstallShield Wizard starts installing the driver. The Installing HP DAT and USB Mass
Storage Drivers Installer dialog box is displayed, showing the process. See Figure E-9.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential E-9

Figure E-9 Installing HP DAT and USB Mass Storage Drivers Installer - InstallShield Wizard

Step 4 In the Plug in the hardware dialog box, click OK.

Step 5 In the InstallShield Wizard Completed dialog box, click Finish.
The installation is complete.
Step 6 Check whether the driver is successfully installed.
1. On the desktop, right-click My Computer and then choose Properties.
The System Properties dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Hardware tab. Then click Device Manager.
The Device Manager dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-10.

E-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure E-10 Device Manager

3. In the Device Manager dialog box, check whether the driver is successfully installed.

----End

E.2 Using a Tape Drive to Back Up CDR Files

This section describes how to use a tape drive to back up CDR files.

Prerequisite
l A tape drive is connected to the iGWB server.
l The SCSI driver and the driver of the tape drive are installed.

Context
Before you start, learn 6.2.1 Basic Knowledge.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Run.
The Run dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Enter ntbackup.

The Backup dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click the Backup tab. Specify the backup folder and backup media. See Figure E-11.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential E-11

Figure E-11 Backup

1. In the Desktop navigation tree, select the source backup path.

2. In Backup destination, select 4mm DDS as the backup media.
3. In Backup media or file name, select New Media.
4. Click Start Backup.
The Backup Job Information dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-12.

Figure E-12 Backup Job Information

Step 4 In Backup description, enter the description of the backup task and then click Advanced.
The Advanced Backup Options dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-13.

E-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure E-13 Advanced Backup Options

Step 5 Select Incremental in Backup Type and then click OK.

The Backup Job Information dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-12.
Step 6 Click Schedule. In the Backup dialog box, click Yes.
TheSave Selections dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-14.

Figure E-14 Save Selections

Step 7 Enter a backup task name and then click Save.

The Set Account Information dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-15.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential E-13

Figure E-15 Set Account Information

Step 8 Enter the administrator name and password of the server and then click OK.
The Scheduled Job Options dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-16.

Figure E-16 Scheduled Job Options

Step 9 On the Schedule data tab, enter a task name and then click Properties.
The Schedule Job dialog box is displayed. See Figure E-17.

E-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure E-17 Schedule Job

Step 10 To perform a backup task at 2:00 everyday, on the Schedule tab, select Daily in Schedule
Task, enter 2:00 in Start time, and enter 1 in Schedule Task Daily. Then click OK.
The Scheduled Job Options dialog box is displayed.

Step 11 Click OK. The backup task is successfully created.

----End

E.3 Using a Tape Drive to Restore CDR Files

This section describes how to use a tape drive to restore CDR files.

Prerequisite
Prepare the tape that stores the backed up CDR files.

Context
You need to restore CDR files in any of the following cases:

l When CDR file errors occur and the related CDR files are deleted on the iGWB.
By default, the iGWB stores CDR files for seven days. After seven days, the iGWB
automatically deletes the expired CDR files. When CDR file errors occur and the CDR files
that need to be confirmed are deleted on the iGWB.
l When exceptions occur in the BC and the related CDR files are deleted on the iGWB.

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential E-15

When exceptions occur on the BC, due to the reason that the iGWB can save CDR files at
the specified interval, the CDR files to be confirmed are deleted after the exceptions are
clear. In this case, the relevant CDR files need to be fetched from the tape.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert a tape into the tape drive.

Step 2 Choose Start > Run.

The Run dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 In the Run dialog box, enter ntbackup. In the Backup dialog box, click the Restore tab.

Step 4 Select the CDR files and destination backup path. See Figure E-18.

Figure E-18 Restore

1. In the 4mm DDS navigation tree, select the CDR files that you want to restore.
2. In Restore files to, select Alternate location.
3. In Alternate location, specify the destination path where the CDR files are restored.
4. Click Start Restore.

Step 5 In the Confirm Restore dialog box, click OK.

The selected CDR files are being restored to the specified path. A process bar is also displayed.
See Figure E-19.

E-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

Figure E-19 Waiting for tape

Step 6 In the Restore Progress dialog box, click Close. See Figure E-20.

Figure E-20 Restore Progress

----End

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential E-17

F Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
AC alternating current
ACPI advanced configuration and power
interface
ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notation One

B
BAM background administration module
BC billing center
BHCA busy hour call attempt
BMC baseboard management controller

C
CDR charging data record
CPU central processing unit

D
DC direct current

F
FTAM File Transfer Access Management
Protocol
FTP File Transfer Protocol

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential F-1

I
iGWB iGateway Bill
IIS Internet Information Services
IP Internet Protocol

K
KVM switch keyboard, video, and mouse switch

L
LAN local area network
LMT local maintenance terminal

M
MML human-machine language

N
NNTP Network News Transfer Protocol
NOS network operating system
NSAP network service access point
NTP Network Time Protocol

P
PC personal computer
PCI peripheral component interconnect
PID process identifier

R
RAID redundant array of inexpensive disks

S
SCSI small computer systems interface

F-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 06 (2009-02-25)

SN sequence number

T
TCP Transfer Control Protocol

U
URL universal resource locator
USB universal serial bus

Issue 06 (2009-02-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential F-3

cause
No ratings yet
cause
341 pages
Windows Server 2012 R2
No ratings yet
Windows Server 2012 R2
211 pages
Huawei Igwb User Manual
No ratings yet
Huawei Igwb User Manual
68 pages
01-2 Install Guide_IGWB
No ratings yet
01-2 Install Guide_IGWB
337 pages
TWS 9.4 Planning and Installation Awspimst
No ratings yet
TWS 9.4 Planning and Installation Awspimst
472 pages
GE Carescape Gateway
100% (1)
GE Carescape Gateway
270 pages
Windows Server Documentation
No ratings yet
Windows Server Documentation
127 pages
Igateway Bill User Manual
100% (4)
Igateway Bill User Manual
191 pages
Datastage 8.5 Installation Guide
100% (1)
Datastage 8.5 Installation Guide
503 pages
H7GMSW-CS User's Manual
No ratings yet
H7GMSW-CS User's Manual
43 pages
Atc TutorialSSIS4
No ratings yet
Atc TutorialSSIS4
2,769 pages
How to Setup n8n Self Hosting - By Waseem
No ratings yet
How to Setup n8n Self Hosting - By Waseem
17 pages
CCMM and Outbound Installation and Maintenance Guide
No ratings yet
CCMM and Outbound Installation and Maintenance Guide
1,024 pages
553-3001-212 10.00 SS PDF
No ratings yet
553-3001-212 10.00 SS PDF
258 pages
ece125_for_ucce
No ratings yet
ece125_for_ucce
173 pages
Igateway Bill User Manual
No ratings yet
Igateway Bill User Manual
475 pages
Server Installation and Configuration Guide
No ratings yet
Server Installation and Configuration Guide
135 pages
SG7000 Feature Description (V200R005C02 - 02)
No ratings yet
SG7000 Feature Description (V200R005C02 - 02)
493 pages
S.Y.B.B.a. (CA) Syllabus From 2022-23
No ratings yet
S.Y.B.B.a. (CA) Syllabus From 2022-23
82 pages
IB40-603.2 WinRCP
No ratings yet
IB40-603.2 WinRCP
66 pages
P C N C C F /G: Oint Lark Etworks Lark Onnect Irewall Ateway
No ratings yet
P C N C C F /G: Oint Lark Etworks Lark Onnect Irewall Ateway
15 pages
FileNet P8 - 5.5.0 Plan and Prepare - c1939555
No ratings yet
FileNet P8 - 5.5.0 Plan and Prepare - c1939555
172 pages
Rman Recovery Steps
No ratings yet
Rman Recovery Steps
10 pages
CitectSCADA Web Client Users Guide
0% (1)
CitectSCADA Web Client Users Guide
44 pages
Client SDK Informix Guide
No ratings yet
Client SDK Informix Guide
92 pages
Data Privacy Contact Form: Republic of The Philippines City of Mandaluyong
100% (1)
Data Privacy Contact Form: Republic of The Philippines City of Mandaluyong
1 page
Accedian NID User Manual
50% (2)
Accedian NID User Manual
152 pages
HPE IMC iHATool Installation Guide 2024
No ratings yet
HPE IMC iHATool Installation Guide 2024
97 pages
SG7000 Hardware Description (V200R005C02 - 02)
No ratings yet
SG7000 Hardware Description (V200R005C02 - 02)
185 pages
Craft Works Quick Start Guide
No ratings yet
Craft Works Quick Start Guide
32 pages
Installation & Maintenance Guide For Co-Resident Server
100% (1)
Installation & Maintenance Guide For Co-Resident Server
3,226 pages
Carpeta Operativa GestionIP
No ratings yet
Carpeta Operativa GestionIP
4 pages
NCCM Administration Installation and Mintenance Guide
100% (2)
NCCM Administration Installation and Mintenance Guide
2,242 pages
DS 8.5 Installation Guide PDF
No ratings yet
DS 8.5 Installation Guide PDF
519 pages
Program Directory For MQ v9
No ratings yet
Program Directory For MQ v9
76 pages
IMS-ZXUN CG-BC-EN-Installation and Commissioning-Software Installation Guide-1-201011-PPT-102
No ratings yet
IMS-ZXUN CG-BC-EN-Installation and Commissioning-Software Installation Guide-1-201011-PPT-102
102 pages
SoftX3000 Software Installation Manual
No ratings yet
SoftX3000 Software Installation Manual
285 pages
Accedian NID Configuration Guide PDF
No ratings yet
Accedian NID Configuration Guide PDF
160 pages
C# Unit 1
No ratings yet
C# Unit 1
303 pages
Queues in CICS - With Paging Logic
90% (10)
Queues in CICS - With Paging Logic
25 pages
Os390 HCD Configuration Definition Planning
No ratings yet
Os390 HCD Configuration Definition Planning
116 pages
Planning and Implementing An IBM SAN
No ratings yet
Planning and Implementing An IBM SAN
400 pages
Loio
No ratings yet
Loio
28 pages
test1-helpful-handout-1
No ratings yet
test1-helpful-handout-1
19 pages
Staff Daily Report 05082020
No ratings yet
Staff Daily Report 05082020
112 pages
Ethernid™ Administrator'S Guide: For The Ethernid™ Ee Ethernid™ Ge Metronid™ Te Metronid™ Te-R
No ratings yet
Ethernid™ Administrator'S Guide: For The Ethernid™ Ee Ethernid™ Ge Metronid™ Te Metronid™ Te-R
166 pages
Feature Description - (V200R008C02 01, NGN)
No ratings yet
Feature Description - (V200R008C02 01, NGN)
432 pages
Ethernid™ Administrator'S Guide: For The Ethernid™ Ee Ethernid™ Ge Metronid™ Te Metronid™ Te-R
No ratings yet
Ethernid™ Administrator'S Guide: For The Ethernid™ Ee Ethernid™ Ge Metronid™ Te Metronid™ Te-R
166 pages
SG7000 Data Configuration (V200R005C02 - 02)
No ratings yet
SG7000 Data Configuration (V200R005C02 - 02)
385 pages
ICTNWK540 AT2 Design, Build and Test Network Servers Noman Bandi
No ratings yet
ICTNWK540 AT2 Design, Build and Test Network Servers Noman Bandi
16 pages
Configuração CIS
No ratings yet
Configuração CIS
18 pages
SG7000 Basic Operations (V200R005C02 - 02)
No ratings yet
SG7000 Basic Operations (V200R005C02 - 02)
71 pages
CICD with Gitlab and Jenkins
No ratings yet
CICD with Gitlab and Jenkins
1 page
02 Part
No ratings yet
02 Part
4 pages
SG7000 Emergency Maintenance (V200R005C02 - 02)
No ratings yet
SG7000 Emergency Maintenance (V200R005C02 - 02)
76 pages
Openshift - Container - Platform 4.11 Architecture en Us
No ratings yet
Openshift - Container - Platform 4.11 Architecture en Us
72 pages
DataPrivacyManagment en
No ratings yet
DataPrivacyManagment en
238 pages
Commissioning Guide - (V200R008C02 01, NGN)
No ratings yet
Commissioning Guide - (V200R008C02 01, NGN)
148 pages
Guia de Configuracion e Instalacion Ocs Inventory
No ratings yet
Guia de Configuracion e Instalacion Ocs Inventory
108 pages
00-2 About This Document
No ratings yet
00-2 About This Document
10 pages
A Guide On Conducting Online Classes: Considerations, Tools and Strategies For Digitization
No ratings yet
A Guide On Conducting Online Classes: Considerations, Tools and Strategies For Digitization
23 pages
Unit 3
No ratings yet
Unit 3
7 pages
SG7000 Compliance and Safety (V200R005C02 - 02)
No ratings yet
SG7000 Compliance and Safety (V200R005C02 - 02)
36 pages
SA3 - Notes Booklet
No ratings yet
SA3 - Notes Booklet
19 pages
Secure Electronic Transaction (SET)
No ratings yet
Secure Electronic Transaction (SET)
15 pages
Automatic Block Repair
No ratings yet
Automatic Block Repair
5 pages
MandaVax Opt-Out
100% (3)
MandaVax Opt-Out
1 page
SG7000 Configuration Examples (V200R005C02 - 02)
No ratings yet
SG7000 Configuration Examples (V200R005C02 - 02)
73 pages
TSTSMART
No ratings yet
TSTSMART
10 pages
SA PCo
No ratings yet
SA PCo
22 pages
12 Free Microsoft Dynamics 365 Course: How To Enroll in Them?
No ratings yet
12 Free Microsoft Dynamics 365 Course: How To Enroll in Them?
15 pages
Azure Service Bus Topic
No ratings yet
Azure Service Bus Topic
6 pages
OLAP Cube: 2 Hierarchy
No ratings yet
OLAP Cube: 2 Hierarchy
4 pages
RCC Create Circuit Group: Function
No ratings yet
RCC Create Circuit Group: Function
11 pages
Ashutosh Dixit: CSM® SR. TECH. CONSULTANT (PFM, Govt. Public Sector)
No ratings yet
Ashutosh Dixit: CSM® SR. TECH. CONSULTANT (PFM, Govt. Public Sector)
4 pages
Carl Teneng
No ratings yet
Carl Teneng
4 pages
The Impact of Information Technology On Business
No ratings yet
The Impact of Information Technology On Business
2 pages
Exam Practice Exercise For AOS
No ratings yet
Exam Practice Exercise For AOS
3 pages
Cs 503 A Data Analytics Dec 2020
No ratings yet
Cs 503 A Data Analytics Dec 2020
3 pages
QOS
No ratings yet
QOS
12 pages
This Is An ODT Template Document Used To Generate Personalized Documents For Your Customers or Suppliers
No ratings yet
This Is An ODT Template Document Used To Generate Personalized Documents For Your Customers or Suppliers
2 pages
Feature History For SIP Tel URI Support
No ratings yet
Feature History For SIP Tel URI Support
4 pages
Learning Journal Unit2 - CS 4404-01 - AY2025-T2
No ratings yet
Learning Journal Unit2 - CS 4404-01 - AY2025-T2
2 pages
User Manual: Huawei Igwb
No ratings yet
User Manual: Huawei Igwb
3 pages
Oracle DBA Syllabus
No ratings yet
Oracle DBA Syllabus
7 pages
User Manual: Part 1 Product Description Part 2 Installation Guide Part 3 Configuration Guide Part 4 Routine Maintenance
No ratings yet
User Manual: Part 1 Product Description Part 2 Installation Guide Part 3 Configuration Guide Part 4 Routine Maintenance
2 pages
0D50
No ratings yet
0D50
1 page
290L ECONAVI INVERTER Bottom Freezer Black 2-Door Refrigerator NR-BV320GKPH
No ratings yet
290L ECONAVI INVERTER Bottom Freezer Black 2-Door Refrigerator NR-BV320GKPH
1 page
Software Download Website
No ratings yet
Software Download Website
18 pages
Updated Aivran's CV
No ratings yet
Updated Aivran's CV
3 pages
CS8074 Cyber Forensics: Anna University Exams April May 2022 - Regulation 2017
No ratings yet
CS8074 Cyber Forensics: Anna University Exams April May 2022 - Regulation 2017
2 pages
Plain JavaScript: Learning the Front-End
From Everand
Plain JavaScript: Learning the Front-End
Roger Beans-Rivet
No ratings yet
vSphere High Performance Cookbook
From Everand
vSphere High Performance Cookbook
Prasenjit Sarkar
No ratings yet
Cloud Computing : Beginners And Intermediate User Guide
From Everand
Cloud Computing : Beginners And Intermediate User Guide
David comer
No ratings yet
10K Blueprint
From Everand
10K Blueprint
Cian O Farrell
5/5 (2)
Getting Started with Oracle Tuxedo
From Everand
Getting Started with Oracle Tuxedo
Biru Chattopadhayay
No ratings yet
CAN Bus for Beginners: A Practical Guide to Automotive Networking
From Everand
CAN Bus for Beginners: A Practical Guide to Automotive Networking
Mohamad Charara
No ratings yet
Mastering Python Advanced Concepts and Practical Applications
From Everand
Mastering Python Advanced Concepts and Practical Applications
Aissa Younes
No ratings yet
Blog Smarter, Not Harder: SEO, Blogging, and AI Strategies to Skyrocket Your Traffic
From Everand
Blog Smarter, Not Harder: SEO, Blogging, and AI Strategies to Skyrocket Your Traffic
Jay Nans
No ratings yet
Cybersecurity for Executives: A Guide to Protecting Your Business
From Everand
Cybersecurity for Executives: A Guide to Protecting Your Business
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
Breaking Barriers: S.T.E.M Mentorship in Business
From Everand
Breaking Barriers: S.T.E.M Mentorship in Business
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
A To Z of Internet: Everything You Wanted to Know
From Everand
A To Z of Internet: Everything You Wanted to Know
Bittu Kumar
No ratings yet
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
From Everand
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
From Everand
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
Content Creation Revolution with chatGPT
From Everand
Content Creation Revolution with chatGPT
Maria Cowen
No ratings yet
Software Patterns Made Easy
From Everand
Software Patterns Made Easy
Justice Nanhou
No ratings yet
Autodesk Fusion 360: A Tutorial Approach
From Everand
Autodesk Fusion 360: A Tutorial Approach
Prof. Sham Tickoo
No ratings yet
SRS - How to build a Pen Test and Hacking Platform
From Everand
SRS - How to build a Pen Test and Hacking Platform
alasdair gilchrist
2/5 (1)

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.